Home

User Manual - myHomeControl

Contents

1. In the sample shown on the left side a counter value 0 12 00 00 of 6 would be written in green 1 D0 00 D0 r Appearance in the general controls area Fan Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the tab Depending on type of the RoomTemperatureControl and the property settings different additional information s will be shown Following supplementary information is available The visualization of this information is configurable Fan E cs A picture Fan u 0 01 19 57 a The minimal and maximal value Additional information dialog uf ef The actual counter value will be 0 00 05 10 Bene Min Max recorded and presented in form of 46 SCC a trending diagram since 03 02 2011 10 02 Also the minimal and the maximal counter value will be recorded Press the button to reset the stored values resets the counter value to 0 00 00 00 MAO IS Counter Value Page 100 100 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Irrigation This visualization element is directly coupled to the corresponding logic block of the network area It indicates the residual humidity in the earth as well as the date and time of the last and the next irrigation cycle Refer to chapter Irrigation to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area The Irrigation function is enabled Bestfeuchte letzte Bow sscorung Fi i d Be Pick up the light
2. Page 115 115 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH d 12000 lux J The percent value means sunshine during the last hour If the value is below 50 then the condition is not fullfilled otherwise the condition is fullfilled 32000 Jux A rain sensor or a weather station as been connected to the shading function Actually there is rain Therefore this condition is not fullfilled Wind t Click the input field to edit the threshold value for the brightness 15 0 m s tI Temperature 23 0 Ie 22 20 0 Shading is suppressed In case the in temperature is below the minimum set point Shading will be processed in case in temperature is above the maximum set point Incase the in temperature is between min and max set point then shading will be processed if the out temperature is above the out temp set point Time frame 01 00 2200 Y Start of frame end of frame Only during the time frame shading takes place Blocking periode The blocking periode is started after every command of the shading function The blocking periode avoids rapid up and down movements of the jalousie Press the button to reset the blocking periode Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 116 116 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Settings This visualization Element shows a lis
3. Controller parameter Heating parameter Basic set point C 246 K Fropotional band Xp K Running time Tn min Max control variable limit 3 100 S Min control variable limit lo The temperature lowering has been activated Therefore this feature must be activated in the actuator block as well Cancel Page 371 371 myHomeControl Teach the actuator block to the universal controller Controller Pl heating with PWM behaviour Digital output 1 Parameter Sensors Sensors Channel Selection vi Sensor Room operating panel SAM SROG SRO gt D Fam Sei rem Xx amp i DZ Sei x used di AAA AAR Ae AA 1 2 a a lo a A SCO 1 Select Type Room operating panel 2 amp Learn in Leam n Manual leamn of sensor ID Gei Leaming sensor ID by leam4n button gt OK Page 372 372 mutiomecontror MORE om Press button send to transmit a LRN radio telegram E0 Spain Temp Correction _ Temp Lowering _ Enable Temp Lowering Dimmer The universal controller is also able to control dimmable electronic ballasts Use types of electronic ballasts providing a 0 10V interface Two outputs of the universal controller will be used to control the lighting equipment One analogue 0 10V output and a binary output turn on and off the lights The configuration shown below uses the universal controller as a
4. 4 Access o Pick up the light at the light symbol to move it to any location of Monday 19 00 On the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot N and adapt it to the situation The clock is inactive a The clock block will not release any events Picture There is also a representation showing a picture In case the visualization element has been touched a control dialog will pop up The control dialog shows a list of all configured events Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 90 90 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH List of events Ca next event Monday 19 00 On So Mo Di Mi Do MM aM 0 20 Within this dialog events can be configured removed or new events might be appended to the list These buttons move the selected event upwards or downwards E E These buttons add a new event beyond the selected event or remove the Pe a selected event A click on the time cell opens the time editor Page 91 91 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH gt Visualization Element Consumer Monitoring This visualization element indicates lights and other kinds of electrically consumers actually situated in the ON state The shown names of lights or other consumers corr
5. Create a new floor by dragging in a floor symbol from the tree view new floors rooms and devices into the workspace area Create a new room by dragging in a room symbol from the tree view new floors rooms and devices into the workspace area of a floor Rename a floor or room by clicking on the name A cursor will appear to edit the actual name Delete a Floor or Room by clicking the right mouse button somewhere in the free workspace area The context menu pops up click delete Page 121 121 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Handling Blocks Fz myHomeControl Fie New Floors Rooms and Devices Tx 09 01 08 13 55 57 Create a new block by dragging in the corresponding block symbol from the tree view New Floors Rooms and Devices and drop it into the workspace area Insert an existing block from an other room by dragging in the corresponding block symbol from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices and drop it into the workspace area Radio signals are able to pass walls There might be a PTM radio button located e g in the staircase providing the function All Lights OFF The dotted border around the block indicates that the blocks origin location is in an other room To setup a block hover the mouse over the property symbol T The Properties dialog will pop up automatically Delete a block via the context menu right mouse button click on the block If
6. NA H There are two principles to control the illumination Switch able lights Illumination is controlled by the amount of lights switched on Dim able lights Illumination is controlled by the intensity of light Switch able lights A trigger block monitors the brightness signal to go below a threshold value individually for each zone In case the brightness value goes below the threshold value the lights of the zone will be switched on Page 350 350 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Dimmable lights For each zone the measured value from the brightness sensor will be transformed individually into a value to control the dimmer devices The transformation is done by scaling blocks Set up of the scaling blocks Calculation of the scaling factor BVd Brightness value dark max value for the brightness where the light is still fully bright BVb Brightness value bright min value for the brightness where the light is turned off Factor 100 BVb BVd Offset 100 1 BVd BVb BVd Application sample BVd 1000 Lux BVb 10000 Lux Factor 100 10000 1000 0 0111 Offset 100 1 1000 10000 1000 111 11 Glow suppression In case the value for the dimmer control comes to a small value e g lt 20 then the dimmed lights do not illuminate the room anymore Therefore the lights will be switched of to save energy This function is done by the Trigger and the Analog
7. Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Dimmer Page 134 134 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Remarks to the observer input This remark is valid for Dimmers supporting the central command EEP 07 38 02 In this configuration the radio button has been directly teached to the dim actuator The dim actuator block in myHomeControl observes the radio button to update its internal model This is not very accurate and may result in asynchronicity between the block and the dim actuator Therefore this configuration is not recommended In this configuration only the dim actuator block in myHomeControl controls the dim actuator The touch dim function is done by the block The block sends corresponding dimming values to the dim actuator This method results in better synchronicity between the block and the dim actuator It is recommended to operate dim actuator though myHomeControl and to not teach radio button directly to the dim actuators if possible Remark to parallel connection of multiple dimmers The parallel connection as shown in the picture beside is not possible with all tyoes of dimmer actuator devices The parallel connection is only recommended for dimmer types supporting the central command EEP EEP 07 38 02 transmittion of brightness values 0 100 Syntax of the scene values as they can be set within the properties dialog of the scene block 0 D
8. Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action Send OFF Cmd Starts in the evening shows the calculated time to start the presence simulation in the evening From this time on the lights will be illuminated The start time is calculated automatically about 40 minutes after sunset Sleep Phase from defines the time where the sleep phase begins During this phase the lights will not be illuminated This simulates that the inhabitants are sleeping Page 166 166 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sleep Phase to defines the time where the sleep phase ends From this time on the presence simulation block starts to illuminate lights again Ends in the morning shows the calculated time the simulation ends The lights will be switched off and the jalousies will be raised This time is calculated about 40 minutes before sunrise The Heating hours before return define the required heating period to raise the temperature in the controlled rooms from the lower temperature during absence to the normal temperature conditions The input field Absent till might be used to enter a date for the return for test purposes Usually this input will be done on the control dialog of the absence function with in the presentation view Activate Simulation Mode This feature is for testing purposes If simulation mode has been activated then the block will ignore the actual time of day and simulates operation during the night hours The simulati
9. Configuration check This function is not yet implemented Page 337 337 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH License options myHomeControl basic functionallity can be extended by various additional features These features are enabled by license options which can be acquired separately The enabled options are shown in the menu About License option Weather Support for various weather stations The weather data acquired by the weather station can be shown in the visualization and might be used within the networks for logical operations This option is enabled by default License option Email SMS phone Support for email sms and phone This option enables the corresponding blocks to send emails sms This option is enabled by default License option EnOcean Enables the communication to EnOcean enabled devices This option is enabled by default License option Modbus TCP Enables the communication to ModbusTCP enabled devices License option Modbus RTU Enables the communication to ModbusRTU enabled devices License option PEHA PHC Enables the communication to PHC devices License option Baudrate selector Enables to control the communication speed to the gateway This option is usefull in case the gateways used supporting various communication speeds License option CompactWEB small By default the amount of simultaneous browser sessions is limited to 3 License option CompactWEB large This opti
10. Sample 452 FU EP JR G T re Br J Boe In case the door to the balcony is open then the window contact locks the jalousie block which prevents automatic jalousie movements The locking state of the jalousie block is shown as follows Jalousie is able to move Page 139 139 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Jalousie is locked Invert changes the polarity of the locking input pin Buttons The left buttons behave in the same manner then the buttons of an eventually connected PTM radio button The upper button raises the jalousie A second short button click stops the movement The lower button v lowers the jalousie A second short button click stops the movement The lower button drives the jalousie to the shading position This button is only visible if the driving time for shading is different then the driving time for darkening State indication 452 FU EP JR The jalousie is in its upper end position d a 7 ESES 457 FU EP JR The jalousie is moving The jalousie is in its darkening position The jalousie is in its shading position Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Jalousie 1 Syntax of the scene values as they can be set within the properties dialog of the scene block 0 The jalousie will be driven to its upper end position in case the corresponding scene has been selected 1 100 Th
11. The voltage sensor generates an ON command in case it detects a voltage at its input pins Otherwise it sends an OFF command F Mame Voltagesengor Product Funkstuhl SG FUS 24 230 Ar The voltage sensor block provides 1 output pin The block sends out an ON command in case it detects a voltage at its input pin And vice versa it sends an OFF command in case there is no voltage State indication ON OFF Button s The button in the middle of the block enables to simulate voltage at the input pin This is just for testing purposes of the network If the block receives a radio telegram form the real sensor it immediately updates its own state to the reported state State indications voltage detected An ON command has been sent trough the output pin of the block no voltage Voltages ensor o BR An OFF command has been sent trough the output pin of the block This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e similar to Profile Light Switch Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Page 284 284 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample No visualization element is available yet for thi
12. d E Assign this sensor to both channels AO3 and DOS Page 375 375 myHomecontoo MORE Switching actuator Usage of the universal controller as a switching actuator D None ay Product Thermokon SRC ADO BCS D 7 JO ely iin Off Warning z t in _ invert _ button following mode _ Blocking enable Consumption Select the operation mode for the channels 2 SRC ADO configuration software thermokon Sensortechnik GmbH Analog outputs ia AO AOS EISE Digital outputs Page 376 376 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Teach the actuator block to the universal controller Sensor individual Digital output 3 Parameter Sensors Sensors Channel Selection Device type Sensor D 1 EI Room operating panel SRD4 7 SRO6 SRO s i 2 A 4 arm amp E Page 377 377 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Appendix D How to add a supplementary language Text resources 1 Open database Resources Languages mdb using MS Access Open the table Languages Switch to the design mode Append an additional row Name it corresponding to the language Data type Text Switch to data view Fill up the empty column with the translated texts Close MSAccess oe oe le a Alternatively the database might be exported into an excel data sheet Help The source files for the help system are MS word documents For each language there is an own document Cop
13. lt Represents the first channel lt Represents the second channel The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually Page 160 160 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Logic The logic blocks to not represent physical devices They only exist in myHomeControl They process convenience functions The logic blocks might be inserted between sensor and actuator blocks or be cascaded by them self Activation Most of the logic blocks provide an optional activation feature The activation feature can be enabled within the properties dialog of the blocks _ Activation If the activation feature has been enabled then the block shows an additional pin to control the activation status of the block The activation input pin indicates the enabled activation feature and the status of the activation D Block is activated Bi Block is deactivated Function A logic block can be activated or deactivated A deactivated block doesn t send any commands or signals to its successor block s Internally the block evaluates its state independent if it is activated or not The block stores the last command sent in case it is activated or would have sent in case it is deactivated It stores this command as last event The properties dialog contains following controls in case the bloc
14. time base The time base is an option to be configured within the properties dialog The counter 1 block provides to different output pins lt Counter value lt Consumption value lt Sampling interval in seconds lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed Regard the special teach in procedure for this device Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The device uses its own proprietary profile Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Counter 1 Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 258 258 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 7 Counter 2 This block represents a TST230 01 device provided by Omnio where a special firmware has been loaded This device provides two individual counters This block represents the whole device It acts as a container for 2 blocks of type Counter 1 Teach In procedure The device TST230 01 with firmware Counters requires a special procedure for the teach in 1 Press the Teach button of the properties dialog of the whole device block counter 2 sa Channel 2 2 Remove the power supply of the device and reconnect it again The device sends a teach telegram during the startup Manual input of the address This device sends on 3 addresses StartUp A5 5A OB 07 00 00 00 OA Kanall A5 5A OB 07 FF FF FF OF Kanal A5 5A OB 07 FF FF FF OF 00 93 00 94 00 93 To enter the address manually click the input field for
15. 0 385 kWh Power S4 sec Sampl Interval r e o a The counter device e g Omnio TST230 01 with firmware Counter is electrically connected to the pulse output of an electricity meter This output toggles e g every 100Wh The counter device counts these pulses and calculates the consumed energy as well as the consumed power The output pin actual power consumption as well as the output pin sampling interval have to be connected to the corresponding input pins of the Load Limitation block The Load Limitation function compares the consumed power against the time conditions See below and evaluates if there is an overload situation Depending on the result of the evaluation the function turns on or off connected consumers Only switch actuator blocks are connectable to the Load Limitation block The ch actuat s provide a blocking input pin This input pin doesn t control the state of the switch actuator block It er ON or OFF as it was before But the blocking input controls the state of the physical switch actuator Whenever the blocking is activated the physical switch actuator is turned off If the blocking gets released then the physical switch actuator get turned on if the state of the switch actuator block is ON As soon as the switch actuator block gets connected to a Load Limitation block an additional input field appears within the properties dialog of the switch actuator block For details refer to switch T
16. Activation Function The PID algorithm is executed every 1 second The output is updated if it changed by at least 1 This block supports the Activation Feature Properties Factor ES Running Time in minutes Derivative D Min Limitation Min limitation of the output value Max Limitation Max limitation of the output value Noise Suppression The controller outputs a new signal value if the value changed at least by the value of the noise suppression Application sample This sample shows a closed loop control for a room heating The room control panel measures the actual temperature and provides a set point value for the temperature The PID controller evaluates the requested heating power as a value The PWM pulse width modulator converts the analogue value to a sequence of ON and OFF command corresponding to a modulated pulse sequence The RCM250 switch actuator is used to control a thermo dynamic valve heating valve Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 211 211 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH PIN This block might be used to build up a security system The block requests the input of a PIN code by the user to activate or deactivate the security system ON Zock OFF unlock gt lt lock state ON locked The block knows two individual states locked and unlocked An ON command on the input triggers the block to change to the locked sta
17. Additional application samples PTM230 Module Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 241 241 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Trigger The trigger block compares an analogue signal with a threshold level and generates commands in case the signal passes the level The threshold level may either be entered in the properties dialog of the block or via the a analogue input pin Analogue Signal Input gt Threshold Level gt Command Input for the Activation gt JE Meme Tor Treshold level ol Hysteresis _ invert Delay sec h active last event Actvaton Acton No Action Deactivation Action No Action The button copies the actual value of the analogue signal into the threshold level field The threshold level field is inactive in case the corresponding input pin is connected In this case the value of the level is taken from the signal pin Function The trigger block supports a threshold value and a hysteresis value Depending on its internal state the block monitors if the signal analogue input will go over the threshold level or will go under the threshold level In case the actual state is BELOW the block generates an ON command if the signals value becomes greater then the Threshold level It changes its internal state to ABOVE In case the actual state is ABOVE the block generates an OFF command if the signals value becomes lesser then the Threshold level the
18. Commands without key press information ON Logic blocks e g Clock generate this kind of commands This command doesn t carry any information about key press duration The different block react on this kind of commands in an appropriate way e g a dimmer switches on or a jalousie runs to its end point OFF see ON TOGGLE This command is generated by a toggle block in case it receives an ON or OFF command Typically the v command will be generated by button sensors The commands without key press information are typically generated by logic blocks e g Clock Day Light etc The reaction on this kind of commands is different form block to block It is described in the block specific sections of this document Page 126 126 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Device type and location information Supplementary information about the concrete product type the location of the device within the building the labeling might be entered in this dialog Device type and location information Producer 3 compatible Data Sheet mmio len UPS230 01 Flush mounted switch actuator 1 Channel 230V 13A z n eum teed i Domo eme ru rorida saor ma soen GNFUESTIOG Rain Sat Crk _js ruEm mE Seene Weieen I ze Dina SIFU ma AKF Steg cut wt Wap oma oa a i Funkstuhl FB 230_TFle Switching actuator Button Follower The column compatible indicates products which are compatible to the selected product Compatible mea
19. No Action Deactivation Action No Action This block supports the Activation Feature Application sample SRHF Temp 20 07 setpoint Temp 19 8 Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 169 169 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH amp And The And Block sends an ON Command in case it receives an ON Command from all its predecessor blocks i T m vw active last event Actvaton Acton No Action Deactivation Action No Action Function The And block checks the And Condition It changes between two states And Condition fulfilled The block received from all predeceasing blocks an ON command as last command And Condition not fulfilled The block received at least from one predecessor block an OFF command as last command If the And block changes its state to And Condition fulfilled then it sends an ON command to its successor blocks If it changes to the state And Condition not fulfilled then it sends an OFF command to its successor blocks The And block supports the Activation Feature Application sample The ventilator is only running if all windows are closed Page 170 170 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Properties The properties dialog shows the state of the commands received from the predecessor blocks State indication The toggle block knows the states ON and OFF If changes its state with each processed comma
20. Page 187 187 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Equals This block compares the values of all signals connected to its input If all these values are within a band then the block sends an ON command otherwise an OFF command 0 100 Activation Function This block compares the values of all signals connected to its input If the difference between the smallest and the largest signal value is smaller then the band value see Configuration then the block sends an ON command otherwise an OFF command Properties Band defines the range within all the signal values have to be that the block sends the ON command This block supports the Activation Feature Application sample Page 188 188 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH File Read This block reads a XML File and evaluates the signal values specified in the file Then it forwards the evaluated signal values to its output pins and from there to the network lt SignalCollection lt BinarySignal Name Sigl Value 1 gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig2 Value 3 1 Unit PI gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig3 Value 2 5 Unit V gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig4 Value 0 01 Unit 1 h gt lt BinarySignal Name Sig5 Value 1 gt lt BinarySignal Name Sig6 Value 1 gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig7 Value 1 Unit V gt lt SignalCollection gt Function The Block monitors the specified XML File for changes new version of f
21. Page 222 222 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 send email This feature is available if the License option email SMS phone has been enabled This block sends an email if it receives an ON command 7 Name Einbruch An hans meier bluewin ch CR Gen ung s wurde w hrend der Abwesenheit ein Fenster ge ffnet gt Function This block sends an email to the address given in the Properties dialog The figure below shows an example of a transmitted email Einbruch Nachricht Nur Text Unicode UTF 8 Von myHomeControli bluewin ch Gesendet Mi 27 06 2007 07 05 An hans meier bluewin ch Co Betreff Einbruch Es wurde w hrend der Abwesenheit ein Fenster ge ffnet To enable the sending of emails account information s have to be given in the main Options tab see Options gt Email Page 223 223 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH send SMS This feature is available if the License option email SMS phone has been enabled This block sends an email if it receives an ON command This block is still under development Refer to send email Application sample In the example above the presence simulation activates the window monitoring The window monitoring monitors if all windows stay closed In case one window will be opened it will send an ON command through its alarm output This command is forwarded to the connected send SMS block Page 224 224 myHomeControl V
22. Refer to pins 1 and 2 In case a rocker push button is directly linked to the blinds actuator then the block registers any operations of the rocker push button via the obsever input pin If the jalousie has been lowered by this button then the block automatically send a raise command after a short delay Windmonitoring feature of the jalousie block versus the windmonitoring feature of the shading block Both features result nearly in the same Following table shows the differences between the two features Windmonitoring of the Jalousie block Windmonitoring of the Shading block All ower commands of the network are The threshold value might be set by the user in suppressed by the block the dialog of the visualization element of the The threshold value can only be set in the block settings dialog of the network block The command from the network are not suppressed by the jalousie block This means in case of a lowering command the jalousie gets lowered The shadow controller sends raise commands cyclically in case of strong winds Therefore the jalousie gets raised after at least 5 minutes Locking feature The locking feature shows an additional input pin This pin might be used to lock the jalousie block via commands from the network This prevents the jalousie block from driving the jalousie This feature is usefull to implement general motion locking in case of building maintenance e g window cleaning
23. The range for the input values is 0 100 Properties The Interval defines the rate for the generation of the pulses This is the time between two pulses State Indication The last sent command was an ON command The last sent command was an OFF command This sample shows a closed loop control for aroom heating The room control panel measures the actual temperature and provides a set point value for the temperature The PID controller evaluates the requested heating power as a value The PWM pulse width modulator converts the analogue value to a sequence of ON and OFF command corresponding to a modulated pulse sequence The RCM250 switch actuator is used to control a thermo dynamic valve heating valve Page 217 217 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks 2 Run This block is used to run other windows applications Input pin for commands gt Properties File C Program Files amp 46 intemet Explorer explore exe File Enter path to the application file which shall be run Arguments Enter argument string for the application Create Window defines whether the application shall be run in a window or not If this option is selected then there is an opportunity to select whether the window shall be opened normal minimized or maximized Not all applications regard these options Find details about the corresponding visualization element in c
24. This block represents a multiple switch actuator with 8 channels For details refer to Switch Actuator 2 Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Switch Actuator 8 Valve 1 This block represents a single channel heating valve actuator typically used with radiators or floor headings This block will also be used to represent a channel of a multiple valve actuator Single channel valve actuator One channel of a multiple lt Name of the multiple valve actuator channel valve actuator lt Name of the channel This name appears in the visualization Function This block sends radio messages to a physical valve actuator device This block has to be teached to a real valve actuator Page 155 155 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Input for the actual temperature gt Input for the set point temp gt Input for the lowering cmd gt DO Product Thermokon SRC DO Typi PWM Conectori Temp Lowering The valve actuator block scales the received temperature values from the network and sends them as radio message to the valve actuator The temperature control logic is processed by the valve actuator The valve actuator block sends the calculated values every 30 minutes to the valve actuator to avoid the actuator to enter an alarm condition due to missing radio communication Properties dialog Tab Signal Values The Correction value can be used to
25. Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Floor plans it 1 S Se eis E n Logi h Szenen wi Anwesenheitssimulation amp berwachung a 22 Verbraucher berwachung Gesch Anwesenheitssimulation ES anwesend abwesend ORE Rl Seen O T r f general Aane controls The left area of the screen is the workspace area to show floor plans Several floor plans can be inserted Therefore drag in a floor symbol out of the tree view new floors rooms and devices and drop it on the left area This creates a new floor tab Equip the floor tab with a floor plan picture To select a picture open the properties dialog black rectangle or right mouse button context menu and click the open folder button EE dei always visible avoids the tab to get hidden by a always visible link function Visible after startup Visible after startup sets the tab visible after Background Image starting the application myHomeControl Name E Background Image Position ae Picking dots on the dotted border of the picture horizontal 0 vertical support locating and stretching of the picture as well Width 108 Height Keep Proportions Adapt Size automatically lt If checked will myHomeControl adapt the size of the picture to fit into the full screen N Center Obfuscation Design Mode 60 l A smoky cover of the background picture highlights the visualization el
26. __ oon H H H H H i H H 4 H H H H i H H H H d H H H H H H H H i H H H 1 H 4 H H H H 3 i H H 06 09 07 07 27 56 Visualization elements for general control can be placed on the left side workspace e g the visualization element for the presence simulation Tabs organize this workspace area You are free to define any new tabs There is no relation to floors Page 43 43 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The Design mode This mode is used to configure the Visualization Within this mode the floors will be inserted and the visualization element can be placed The tree views for new and used devices will be shown in this mode Ke ks SI Presentation View Password i myHomeControl V1 2 2 File Edit p Visualization Network 4 3Lists X Settings Test New Floors Rooms and Devices 3 N N V AN N N Ed Ground ENE A Rx Tx 08 01 2010 14 22 53 321 O Floor area Floors have to be inserted in this area A floor plan can be deposited on each floor see floor Property dialog General controls area Certain visualization elements can be placed only in this area Switch over to presentation view A password can be given to prevent unauthorized users to return to the design view Tree view New Floor
27. block for details th Wind ims ES eem Temperature 06 02 2009 indoor max 20 0 4 Sun Ri j 3 E Sr S Sen onor D I 3 m vw active last event The PTM button enables the user to activate and deactivate the automatic shading Automatic Shading and time controlled blind movements This Sample illustrates how to combine clock timer controlled blinds with the shading function Typical use case is when blind are lowered during night times for energy saving purposes The owenng command gets delayed by thes block by 2 2 man the blinds when it gets deactivated which is not the typical case Binds move up in case user selects manual mode Page 354 354 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Heating Interrupt heating in case a window has been opened This sample decreases the set point value for the temperature depending on the window state and if somebody is at home A Room Temperature Sensor provides the actual temperature and a value for the temperature set point The actual temperature and the set point value is directly forwarded to the Temperature Controller The temperature controller performs the closed loop control of the room temperature In the above sample it provides three individual temperature set points for normal operation for absence and in case a window is open The upper most set point is used under normal conditions by means of if no other set point has been activated The absence function activate
28. id idHex specifies a EnOcean Id to be accepted description is free text describing to which device the id is belonging This text will not be evaluated by myHomeControl If additional lines are required copy and add them There is no limitation in the amount of lines If all ID fields are empty or there are no lt EnOceanid lines then the id filter is disabled This file is evaluated during the start of myHomeControl and every time the EnOcean protocol is changed If the id filter is active there are Ids given in the configuration file then a link is shown on the EnOcean communication configuration page This link might be used to check the list of ids of the id filter Szenario Training course with different workplaces Each workplace has its own set of EnOcean devices for training purposes Each workplace requires an own dedicated EnOcean ld filter file The EnOcean lds of all sensors of the corresponding workplace have to be configured within the filter file The file has to be stored eiter on a CD or an USB stick which will become part of the workplaces equipment If the trainee reinstalls myHomeControl then he she has to process following step after the installation select menu gt other files gt EnOcean This opens a folder containing a template Id Filter file copy the EnOcean ld filter file from the CD or stick to the folder opened in the step before restart myHomeControl Page 322 322
29. myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Ej Design Mode The Design Mode block is used to return to the design mode from the presentation mode command input ON gt amp H lt Design mode Presentation mode Function If the appearance for the presentation mode has been configured to Full Screen without menu bar under the general settings then the only way to return to the design mode after the presentation mode has been activated is to use the Design Mode block Typically the user clicks the Visualization Element Design Mode to return to the design mode This element provides the opportunity to request the input of a pin code before activating the design mode Input pin An ON command on this pin activates the design mode Ouput pin On each change from the presentation mode to the design mode the block sends an ON command on each change from design mode to presentation mode the block sends an OFF command Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Design Mode Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 181 181 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH amp Display The purpose of this block is to display any signals from the network area by means of connections between blocks The visualization element corresponding to this block displays the actual values of the signals as well as there trends Foor identiier Out te Omeowar ER 2 Ic Een 5 a oo oje S
30. then 0 5 seconds the dimming process will be started This is unexpected behavior with the Central OFF key v Forward OFF Cmd _ invert v strip key press duration information Detay se m w active last event Activation Action Descivalon Acton lohnen In this case insert a filter block and enable the strip key press duration information feature This avoids dimmer blocks from entering the dimming processes Page 345 345 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Delayed Off A PTM radio button located next to the entrance door is used to switch on and off the lights of the corridor and the access to the house After say goodbye to our guests the lights of the corridor will be switched of by pressing the OFF button of the PTM radio button The lights of the access to the house shall light for another 30 seconds to lead the guests to there car Dr Neme OFF dees _ Forward ON Cmd Forward OFF Cmd invert If the OFF button has been pressed the filter block OFF delayed will delay the OFF command This means it stores the OFF command for about 30 seconds and sends it to the switching actuator after the delay period has expired Special case If the ON button will be pressed once again before the delay has been expired then the filter block rejects the stored OFF command to avoid unexpected switch off of the illumination of the access to the house Page 346 346 myHomeControl Boot Up G
31. then click the input pin myHomeControl The switch actuator block will now react if buttons of the PTM radio button block are clicked It will change its state corresponding to the buttons clicked This is the simulation feature provided by the networks To simulate the network doesn t require any physical devices Page 18 18 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Connect the blend to the second output pin of the radio button block Tam yHomeControl E m x File Ep Visualization Ber letwe 23 Lists Logging 4 Options S i Test The different input pins cause different reactions of the blend block A detailed description can be found in chapter Jalousie Page 19 19 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Within the next step it is shown how to build up scenes First connect all actuators participating the scenes to the scene block myHomeControle File ET Visualization ElNepwerk Last Lloggng Options Test HAE o o 270208 171012 The scenes in the above example will control the floor lamp and the blend Page 20 20 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The next step defines the different scenes F myHomeControl SNE File 7 Visualization Network asp Logging Options Test 27 02 08 17 19 36 Clicking the button will create a new scene With in the first row of the table not the header a name for the scene can b
32. 12 2 Jalousie 1 3 12 3 Jalousie 1 12 4 Jalousie 1 12 5 Jalousie 1 12 6 Jalousie 1 3 12 7 Jalousie 1 12 8 Jalousie 1 12 3 Jalousie 1 71 ee ere ul ul To insert the second channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 12 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter Jalousie 12 to find details about the network functionalities Page 81 81 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH i Visualization Element Switch 1 This visualization element represents a single switch actuator But it can be used to switch all kinds of electrical consumers e g fans pumps Refer to chapter switch 1 to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the switch 1 icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area Properties dialog There are different appearances available for this visualization element If indication only is checked then the light cannot be switched on or off anymore from the visualization screen List of the available appearances Appearance specific configuration items N indicate Off Delay indicate On Delay Geschossname Position prion Border honzontal 28 Position of the visualization element within the floor plan Width J9 Page 82 82 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appearance Ligh
33. 163 Absence ui ccccsceccscsccscescsccscsccecsesscsecassecacsusacsusassasassasaevssaevasaesassesasaesasaesasaesatsusatsusatsusatsucateacattasasenees 164 Addition penne 169 BR A E 170 PURO OI E 172 EE 174 D C1OCK cececcsseccssccsssccssccsssessuccsseessecesuccsseessuccsssessuccssscssscsssscssvcssuscsssesssecssecssvesssscssecssacessecssseceseesssecssees 175 Ga Communication Montormg 177 gt gt Consumer Montormg ee 178 BB Mea Biel 179 Ej SSI NOO ee ee Eee 181 OD Display cccccecsscessecsecseseceesecsesecseceesecsecsesecsucatsucsucersuceesarsucetsussucetsusevsussesarsucsesatsesatsatsesarseceesateeeees 182 d Division 185 PN Door Controller cccccccccscscsssssessesstsssssesscsessessecsessessessessessessesitstarssseissisestestivssessesiesiessesseseseeseeseeee 186 Pam Een Rn EEE EEE 188 Bi GA EE 189 E File Write csceccssecseccsescecsssecssecsvecsvecsecsuecsuecsvessecesecssecssecsuesavessesssesssecsuessuessessesssecssessvessvesseessesasecee 190 d Filter cocccccccccccccssssssssssecesecsssssssssssssssssssvvessssssssssssssssssisessssssesssssisssssisessssstssssssissiitisesssssssesssssseseeee 191 MEE Hour Meter 194 ee 195 eege 196 SEET 198 Page 5 5 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH gt Ee 200 W I 201 Load Uimitaton kokana kakana kn ka akona Lakn ALAL DL SADESA EAEAEA EANA EA EA EAEAEAEAEAErE nErenn nn 201 Maximum 205 X Minimum 206 Multiplication oo e cece cececcecescescescescesceseeesesseeseececcecees
34. 317 oat WEB Server has ee energie 317 POLEN UDO ass aaa ee San Bee en a oe ae ee ee 317 Multiple Operating Stalions ara aa aaa arena 318 GOOglEPOWerMeter E 319 COMMUNICATIO M FRRBRFREPPFEFEFFPERTPEPFFFFEFPFEBEFFEFENCEFPEREPEFEFEEFFFEFPERFPEFTEFERFPFELTEPEFPEEFFEFSETFEFERSPLEEFETEFSFEREFFEITFPEPEFEFSEREPEFFE 320 EMO CE cama COMMUNIC AMOI an A nee AA 321 Sait E Te FINE eu a 322 EnQCean E EIN Ge reel WT EE 323 OMNO485 EE 324 Rue ein E EE 327 Moabus Communication u nn ee a ee 332 MOGDUSTCP EE 332 MOdDUSRT Usa nee ee ee ma 333 eeler Lef ee ee 334 LIONS Eee ehe bee ee teens 342 PCC SS e EE 342 PINM2S0 MOAUE nee ee ee ee 343 HE EE 345 Baba GE EE 346 Lights in office Controlled DY radio Geen nn a an 347 ee EE 348 BONS VUE TTS OI Ole en een ernannt 350 Jalousie BINAS 2 2 SRE 353 PUTO MAG SHAd NG E 353 Automatic Shading and time controlled blind movements n ssnnnssennseennnrereessrrrrrrreessrrnrnrtnreenseen n 354 SIS le BE 355 Interrupt heating in case a window has been opene 355 Proportional Heating Valve from Kieback amp Peter ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeneees 356 MOOMOperalingd Panel from E TEE 358 SEENEN 360 Alarm in case of window will be opened or a presence indication during absence 360 Forwarding of an alarm message to all PCs of the nebwork nennen 361 Create and play an text message audio 364 COMMON WINS i rue eier 366 SMIE ON EE 366 Page 8 8 myHo
35. 50 C e EEP 07 02 07 Range 20 C to 60 C Page 282 282 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH e EEP 07 02 08 Range 30 C to 70 C e EEP 07 02 09 Range 40 C to 80 C e EEP 07 02 0A Range 50 C to 90 C e EEP 07 02 0B Range 60 C to 100 C e EEP 07 02 10 Range 60 C to 20 C e EEP 07 02 11 Range 50 C to 30 C e EEP 07 02 12 Range 40 C to 40 C e EEP 07 02 13 Range 30 C to 50 C e EEP 07 02 14 Range 20 C to 60 C e EEP 07 02 15 Range 10 C to 70 C e EEP 07 02 16 Range 0 C to 80 C e EEP 07 02 17 Range 10 C to 90 C e EEP 07 02 18 Range 20 C to 100 C e EEP 07 02 19 Range 30 C to 110 C e EEP 07 02 1A Range 40 C to 120 C e EEP 07 02 1B Range 50 C to 130 C Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Modbus Function Channels optional 7 Name Temperature bg Product Generisch Temperature gt ModbusTCP Slave Slave Zi This section becomes visible in case the block has been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus Value Inp Reg 0 E I9 proj Range generc ModbusTCP Slave The List box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with Value This analogue signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block Page 283 283 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Voltagesensor
36. Access to home Page 162 162 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH a Abs Humidity This function calculates the absolute Humidity based on the temperature and the relative humidity This function is usefull to build control logic for ventilation system Often the outside absolute humidity is compared with the inside absolute humidity an a fan is controllled accordingly Formula SatturationPressure 6 1078 Math Pow 10 7 5 Temperature 237 3 Temperature VaporPressure RelHumidity 100 SatturationPressure Output 216 687 VaporPressure 273 15 Temperature in g m3 Properties Activation E active last event Actvaton Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action This block supports the Activation Feature Application sample Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 163 163 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Absence This block manages all functions during absence These functions are Check in checkout of the users Presence simulation is done by switching on lights of the house randomly The lights get illuminated in different rooms at different times Activation of security and monitoring functions Temperature control my means of changing temperature set points during absence Application sample If the last user leaves the building it has to check out This will be done at the PTM radio button
37. Connect the sensor first before entering the corresponding threshold level value At the earliest and at the latest define a time frame Shading is only processed during this time frame Blocking time To avoid that the jalousies run up and down at changing weather conditions there is a movement delay Between to movements there must be at least a delay of 15 minutes The Blocking time for next movement avoids periodical movement of the blinds The shadow controller awaits at least the specified time period before the next movement In case of over wind conditions the blinds will be raised immediately also before the blocking period as been expired Following rules have to be fulfilled in case a corresponding sensor is connected to the function that the jalousies can be lowered The various conditions are only considerd in case sensors are connected to the corresponding input pins Sample The condition must not rain is only evaluated in case a rain sensor is connected to the rain input pin of the block 1 The actual brightness must be above the brightness threshold level 2 It must not rain 3 The actual wind speed must be below the wind speed threshold level Page 231 231 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 3a The actual indoor temperature muss be above the minimal indoor temperature threshold level and the actual outdoor temperature must be above the outdoor temperature threshold level Or 3b The actual in
38. Create a new host at DynDNS Give a name you will use to access your host from the Internet Settings of the DSL modem router To enable DynDNS to keep track with the changing IP addresses the DSL modem router has to inform DynDNS periodically about the actual IP address received from Internet provider Usually this is a standard service of a DSL modem router Just activate the corresponding client Host HostName dynDNS org Account myAccountName Usually the router contains a firewall or works on NAT These features prevent any traffic initiated by the Internet to access the devices behind the router But the Remote Desktop connection requires exactly this Therefore specific channels have to be opened Configuring a virtual server at the DSL modem router does this Server name external protocol internal Server IP Addr port port Win2000 Terminal Service 3389 TCP 3389 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Win2000 Terminal Service 3389 UDP 3389 u XX XX XX WEB Server 80 jTCP 80 XX XX XX XX Test from the Internet Establish an Internet connection using a common telephone line Start Explorer and connect to www HostName dyndns org tsweb Page 383 383 myHomecontoo MORE om Appendix F Upgrading to Version 1 2 2 In version 1 2 2 the valve actuator block has been redesigned Due to the support of various new valve actuators we found out that most valve actuators interpret the temperature set point value as an offset to a base tempera
39. EnOcean Serial Protocol V1 RS232 En0315 EnOcean Serial Protocol V1 Omnio TI LEn eean Serial Protocol V1 RS485 e BootUp RS485 EnO868 EnOcean Serial Protocol V1 RS485 EnO315 EnOcean Serial Protocol V1 PS Omnio CSCSCC Omnio 485 Bus STC Ethernet SRC Ethernet receiving only Page 341 341 myHomeControl Appendix C Application Samples During the installation process of myHomeControl a demo project has been installed as well It is located in the sub folder DemoProjects and it is called Project_EnOcean Demo Feel free to load it using the menu File Project load Lights Access to home In the evening during sun set the lights of the access to the home shall switch on On working days the lights shall switch off at 22 30 and at the week end at 23 45 for the convenience of our guests 08 04 BR Sunset 20 04 gt v invert m ll active last ewent Ben cn Decian chf cn o When the Clock gets activated by the Day Light block it generates an ON command which switches on the lights Later the Clock generates an OFF command due to its configured times Page 342 342 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH ozs ao oo cee a C active lastevent Bean sin Deco PTM230 Module The PTM radio button represents in this sample the PTM230 module with two channels Each channel controls an individual switching actuator When the button is pressed the first time the corresponding switching actuator switches on W
40. Fensterkontakt DI PTM Schalter Raumf hler OD 58 Schritschalter gt D Sollwert Cl Szenen amp Tageslicht N Torsteuerung Benutzte Geschosse R ume und Ger te Er Geschossname ji m tetra Rx Tx 25 04 08 12 35 31 A periode of time can be configured for the zoom element to close it automatically if there is not interaction by the user Refer to the settings of the zoom element Regard automatic close will only be performed in case the system is in presentation mode Page 51 51 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sensor Visualization Elements Typically these visualization elements show the measured values of the sensor devices Visualization Element Brightness This visualization element represents a brightness sensor Optionally it provides a trend recording feature Refer to chapter Brightness to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the presence indication sensor icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available for this visualization element Nene Ground Floor Brightness If simulation is enabled the visualization element changes the state on each click _ enable simulation Appearance List of the available appearances Appearance Digital Indicaton Orientation Trend Save Data 7 Configu
41. GmbH Teach in of EnOcean devices After connecting a transceiver and setting up the communication properties in the Options register the EnOcean devices can be teached in The radio button block Door represents a real radio button To keep track of the button operations on the real radio button the block have to be logically coupled to its real button This is done by teaching in the address of the real radio button into the radio button block Vice versa the real actuators should react on there representing actuator blocks The physical actuator for the light should process the commands sent by the switch actuator block Light Therefore the address of the switch actuator block has to be teached in to the real actuator Teaching of a PTM radio button Click the teach button in the properties dialog of the radio button block The teach button starts blinking Click now a button of the real PTM radio button The teach button stops blinking now and the label beside the teach button shows the teached address Teach in of a switch actuator block Gp The switch actuator has to be connected to power Press the LRN Button on ase the switch actuator until it starts blinking The switch actuator is now in teaching Now click the button on the switch actuator block The block sends a radio message which will be received by the real switch actuator The real switch actuator interrupts blink
42. Hysteresis It changes its internal state to BELOW Page 242 242 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample sends an ON command sends an ON command and changes to state and changes to state Mr ABOVE Ss ABOVE Threshold N WA E Hysteresis time sends an OFF cmd and changes to state BELOW State indication State is BELOW The trigger block monitors if the signal passes the threshold level State is ABOVE The trigger block monitors if the signal passes the threshold level the hysteresis The filter block supports the Activation Feature Additional application samples Lights in office controlled by radio chairs Constant light control Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 243 243 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 55 Window Monitoring The window monitoring block collects the states of all attached window handles and windows contacts It evaluates if all the windows where closed Le Action Deactivation Aetion No Aen Function The window monitoring block collects the states of all attached window handles and windows contacts It updates its own internal state depending on the states of the attached window sensors and manages lists of windows with the similar state Indication of the block 1 At least one window is open gt 7 2 No windows are open but at least on is in gt tilt position 3 All windows are closed
43. It requires no special setup of firewalls and routers In case TeamViewer is installed as a service then it runs in the background and the PC can be accessed via Internet at any time Alternative Variant using Remote Desktop Enable WEB Services on the host If the host where myHomeControl is running is running Windows XP professional then the XP CD will be required for the next steps If it is running on another or older operation system the following services have to be installed first a Web Server tsweb Following settings are required if the host is running WinXP prof 1 Setup gt Software gt add remove Windows Components Assistent f r Windows Komponenten Windoms Komponenten Windows amp P EKomponenten konnen hinzugefagt bzw entfernt werden Klicken Ste auf de Kontrollk stchen der Komponenten die hinzugef gt bzw entfernt werden sollen Grau gef llte K stchen kennzeichnen Komponenten die nur zum Teil installiert werden Blicken Sie auf Details um die Unterkomponenten anzuzeigen Komponenten E Internet Explorer E gt E Intermet Intormationsdienste 115 S Message Queuing wh MSN Explorer Beschreibung Enthalt Web und FT P Unterstutzung zusammen mit Unterst tzung f r FrontPage Transaktionen Active Server Pages und Datenbank verbindungen Erforderlicher Speicherplatz D AM j Details verf gbarer Speicherplatz 62274 7 MB _Detais nu click Details Page 380 380 myHomeCont
44. Keycard Switch Refer to chapter Leakage to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the presence indication sensor icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available Symbol Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot 2 and adapt it to the situation Picture There is the opportunity to define an individual image for each state leak proof leaking battery bad Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 58 58 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Presence Indication This visualization element represents the state of a presence indication sensor Refer to chapter Presence Indication to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the presence indication sensor icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available for this visualization element CL Name Presence Indication Ground Floor Presence Indication _ enable simulation Appearance If simulation is enabled the vi
45. Sig4 Value 0 01 Unit 1 h gt lt BinarySignal Name Sig5 Value 0 gt lt BinarySignal Name Sig6 Value 0 gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig7 Value 0 Unit V gt lt SignalCollection gt Function Whenever a signal value changes the block writes the new values to the XML File Properties Automatic Write Enable First a file name has to be given where the block writes the signal values to Then define the signals and there types within the table The block assigns corresponding pins The number of signals is limited to 30 lf Automatic Write Enable is checked then the block updates the XML file on every change of any of the input signals Otherwise if automatic write is disabled the block shows an additional pin Every ON Command on this pin forces the block to update the XML file The file will not be updated automatically anymore Syntax The syntax of the XML File is defined by the FileReader xsd XML Schema The schema can be found in menu gt other files gt XML FileReader xsd Remark The same syntax is been used by the File Read function Page 190 190 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Filter This block forwards only those received commands to the successor blocks which fulfill the filter criteria s e g forwards only ON commands It is also able to invert and delay commands The behavior has to be setup in the properties dialog of the block De Name Fer Forward ON
46. Suites also the needs of mobile phones For further details refer to CompactWEB Start WEB server Menu Settings WEB This configuration item belongs to the functions CompactWEB This option starts the associated WEB server which provides the web content generated by myHomeControl to browsers In case there is already an other WEB server installed on the computer the port number 80 might be occupied myHomeControl s WEB server has to be configured to avoid conflicts between the servers or other applications Find hints to solve port occupancy conflicts in chapter port number Access the WEB server from the Internet requires special additional setting Refer to WEB Remote Access for details Port Number Menu Settings WEB This configuration item belongs to the functions CompactWEB This setting defines the port used by myHomeControl s WEB server To change Port Nr uncheck the checkbox Start WEB server Please consider following rules Port 80 This is the default port used by browsers if no port is given in the web address The web pages can be browsed using following address as an example http X X X X X X X X means the IP address of the PC running myHomeControl other If an other port has been selected then the port has to be given with the web address Ports http X X X X PortNr In case there is already an other WEB server installed on the computer or port 80 is occupied by an other applicat
47. Test eT GI Pr sentationsansicht Passwort Neue Geschosse R ume und Ger te I Neue Geschosse R ume und Ger te amp Sensoren A Bewegung Bl Fenstergrff BP Fensterkontakt DD PTM Schalter e Raumf hler Rx Tx 25 04 08 12 22 12 Fr Rx Tx 25 04 08 12 33 31 Click or touch the Zoom visualization element to zoom into the room A new window opens A detailed plan of the room can be loaded Visualization elements for actuators and sensor can be placed on the room plan Depending on the chosen appearance of the Zoom visualization element it will become fully transparent when changing to the presentation mode You are free to resize the room plan to get enough space to insert additional visualization elements In case a Zoom visualization element has been dragged into a floor the system allocates a corresponding room in the network area This can be seen in the tree Used Floors Rooms and Devices All visualization elements inserted into a Zoom visualization element will be located in the corresponding room They can be found in the network view as well Re myHomeControl re myHomeControl Datei ErBedienung Netzwerk La Listen Einstellungen Test Datei Er Bedienung Netzwerk lt Listen Einstellungen Test Pr sentationsansicht Neue Geschosse R ume und Ger te amp Sensoren A Bewegung DI Fenstergrff GM
48. The property dialog provides a form to fill out a list of times Each row of the form describes a command by means of ON or OFF time and days of week The order of the times in the rows doesn t matter Command The entry in this column defines whether the block sends an ON or an OFF command at the time specified Time Enter the time the command shall be sent The command will be repeated on a weekly basis Check the following columns to define the days of week On all checked days of week the command will be sent Lais These buttons move the selected row Use these buttons to append or insert new rows and to delete existing rows The buttons refer to the selected row To select a row click the corresponding time field Inserts a new row beyond the selected row Deletes the selected row Page 175 175 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH annually Changes the clock timer mode to send events on annually basis Buttons A click on the l button sends an ON command A click on the O button sends an OFF command This simplifies testing of the network State indication The clock is deactivated and will not send any commands The clock is running and will process the list of given times It will send commands at the corresponding times The indications below the buttons informs about the time and the type of command that will be send out next Del mon 19 00 On The filter block supports the A
49. Up GmbH Ce Window Contact cccccceccceccececececcccececccuecececacuausecsecuuuaenecsesenenecsuaeaunenscseauaunecscauauaeserscauaunensceeass 287 Window Handle EE 288 WECOME WEE 290 Operation Bn e TE 292 Network Infrastructure required sisses aan aa ann ae 293 SEIUP Web Pages ne een ee 295 Web page SCUINGS ARRERRERERRFESEENEREERBERENREEEEERELEREEREEENEHENEELERDEHREUBEREEEEEEERERELENEHEEEEEHHEEE HEEEERENEEEENLEENFEEERREERFENEREERE 296 MEMS CUUINGS E EEE AEE E EE E 297 Create Index Page for CompactWEB 22aa22220000000020annnnn00onnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 297 Additional WED e LTC 297 Smart phones e g the IPhone used as a remote control u22u20000nnanann0nonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 298 Remote access via Internet using a WEB Browser or mobile phone uuurusnnnunnonnnnnnnnnnnn 298 Usage of an alternative WEB server uu uu200002a20000 nnn00nnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 298 Tree LEE 305 New Floors Rooms and Devices uzu2200000020nn0nnnunnunnnunnunnnunnunnnunnunnnun nun nun nun nun nun nun nun nun nun nun nun 305 Tabs Ole TEE 305 Used Floors Rooms and Devices 2u2220002000000n00nnn0nnnunnnun nun nun nun nun nun nun mann mann mann m nun mann nnna 307 Beggen LEE 307 Process Interface EE 308 OST E 309 dell ste gu ue E 309 PANN tie 309 OTEHLIUOR Of e d e xian ace coceuparceecacnsaratterscieeasgasm sess
50. _ invert _ button following mode Subsequently following dialog will appear and the new address offset can be entered Actuator reacting on PTM telegrams Sr PTM telegrams contain beside the address also identification for a rocker from left to right A D The physical address will be shown for verification purposes It contains the 4794967169 FFFFFFEih corresponding base address of the gateway in use Page 131 131 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Actuator reacting on STM telegrams Edit Address The physical address will be shown for verification purposes The manual assignment of address offset may result in address conflicts This happens in case an already assigned address offset will be given a second time conflicting addresses Enter an other address or change the address of the indicated device first There is also the opportunity to modify the addresses directly in the list of all devices Page 132 132 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH D Dimmer This block represents a dimmer actuator Function This block generates radio messages to control a physical dimmer actuator This block has to be teached to a real dimmer actuator Command input gt Observer input gt The output pin indicates the actual state of the switching actuator If can be connected to a Consumer Monitoring Block Command input gt Observer input gt Brightness input gt Dimmers
51. a rate of 10 minutes Google offers a set of analysis functions for the power consumption and provides lots of hints to save energy according the meassurements The use of Google PowerMeter requires you to have an account at Google Additional information is provided by following link http www Google com powermeter about W Google PowerMeter waw Google com PowerMeter Join Google Device Token User Id To activate this feature check the box in the upper left corner Then subscribe to Google PowerMeter the first time you activate the feature and announce myHomeControl as meassurement equipment press button Join Google The other fields are filled up during the subscription process Page 319 319 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Communication myHomeControl supports various medias for the communication to sensors and actuators EnOcean Radio Communication Modbus TCP Different drivers are provided for different gateway types or IO field bus devices The various gateways and devices use different communication protocols and are connected to the PC in different ways Samples USB EnOcean Radio Gateway This type of gateway is connected to the PC via USB It communicates to the sensors and actuators via EnOcean radio signals These devices emulate a serial port RS232 COM port The standard EnOcean protocol is used for the communication between the PC and the gateway Settings EnOcean Communicatio
52. adjust the actual temperature value to the set point value in case the controller has an offset error If the set point value has been set to e g 20 degrees and the valve actuator controls the actual temperature to 21 degrees then set the correction value to 1 degree Some valve controllers support a temperature lowering feature or a temperature lowering can be configured in the controller For these types of controllers the valve actuator block provides an additional pin to control the temperature lowering ON command means lowering OFF command means no lowering Tab Device Configuration Adjust following fields to the configuration values of the valve actuator Default values are taken from myHomeControls product data base Name SRC DO Product Thermokon SRC DO Typi Dal Setpoint Offset Range Enable Temp Lowering Page 156 156 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The valve actuators base the temperature control on a base temperature The base temperature is either fix or can be adjusted by the user The range for the temperature is used by the block to scale the received actual temperature value into appropriate values for the valve actuator The various valve actuators interpret the set point value as an offset to the base temperature Common values for the set point offset range are 3 5 Adjust these values to the values used by the valve actuator Application sample The room operating p
53. adjusted Refer to jalousie properties in the network area Page 78 78 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sunblind Rolling Shutter _ gr The direction is configurable H Downwards upwards to the left to the right Instead to the green white stripped drapery an image might be loaded mem State indications The jalousie is in its upper position The jalousie is completely lowered This is the darkening position The jalousie is partly lowered This is the shading position The jalousie is moving downwards The jalousie is moving upwards MM r ut Lil LA Application sample S WR Page 79 79 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH eee 2 Visualization Element Jalousie 2 This visualization element represents a double jalousie actuator This actuator is a combination of 2 single jalousie actuators When you drag in a jalousie 2 icon a jalousie 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the quad jalousie actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Used Floors Rooms and Devices ri GN A R12V JRG 2 H 1 Jalousie 0 E 2 2 Jalousie 1 To insert the second channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 2 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter Jalousie 2 to find details about the network func
54. area Visualization element containing controls may only be grabbed at there border Controls can not be grabbed Control dialog popping up when the visualization element gets touched must be ole grabbed at there border SL Eau Selection There is the opportunity to locate several visualization element in parallel Therefore select first all visualization element of interest To select multiple visualization elements click them with the shift button pressed Alternatively enclose them with the selection rectangle Click the mouse in the background area and move it over the elements to be selected All elements touched by the rectangle will be selected Selected visualization elements are shown with a fat blue dash dotted border To include and exclude single elements from a multi selection click them with the shift button pressed Selected element may be moved with the arrow keys as well Page 45 45 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Alignment Aligned elements are highlighted by the editor in case they get selected The blue dash dotted border frame indicates that scene block has been selected It has been clicked by the mouse The various guide lines show to which of the other elements the scene block is aligned In this sample the vertical blue line indicates that the scene block is left aligned to the temperature element The blue coloring of the selection frame of the temperature element i
55. at the light symbol to move it to any location of the floor plan Se eS ee Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot H and adapt it to the situation The Irrigation function is disabled The connected pumps will not be switched on The estimation of the residual humidity goes on Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 101 101 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH HH Visualization Element Keypad This function supports Keypads up to 20 buttons Application sample Individual text might be assigned to the different keys The keys are configurable to latch The small LEDs in the upper right corner of the key indicate the active latching mode A bright LED indicate a latched key Refer to chapter Keypad to find details about the network functionalities D Visualization Element Link The link function enables the user to directly open floor tabs This function behaves similar to a link ina WEB browser There are some additional functions Authorization A PIN code can be configured which has to be entered by the user before jumping to the floor tab in question Hiding and show floor tabs The link function controls optionally the visibility of the floor tabs Links are normal functions which are part of the project and listed in the project tree They have there representation in the network a
56. been blocked Soon some consumers will be released turned on again Page 105 105 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 3 Visualization Element Operator Screen This visualization element reacts on operator events on the screen e g change of active floor tab page For instance the corresponding network block sends an ON command if the floor tab page gets selected by the operator Refer to chapter Operator Screen to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area a This symbol is only shown in the design mode In the presentation mode it will be Settings y N o E3 Following configurations are available Ove rae Register has been selected ON TONEY The corresponding network block sends an ON Appearance command in case the operator selects the floor tab visible containing this visualization element As soon as the floor tab becomes invisible the network block sends an OFF command Appearance Invisible Design mode is active The corresponding network block sends an ON command in case the design mode has been entered As soon as the presentation mode is active the oo corresponding network block will send an OFF Go Register has been selected command O Designmode is active Position horizontal vaid Border Horizontal 5 ena vn mim Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area P
57. block as shown for FSR12 12V DC Teach in usage as 2 separate channels select position 9 for channel 1 at upper wheel 10 for channel 2 usage as 1 combined channel select position 5 at upper wheel turn lower wheel to positon 2S turn middle wheel to position LRN Now press the lower I Button of the rocker push button After teach in middle wheel to position AUTO Additional application samples Access to Home PTM230 Module Constant light control Universal controller Thermokon SRC ADO BCS Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 153 153 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Modbus Function Channels optional F Name 28 Product Generisch Schaltausgang gt ModbusTCP Slave Slave Zi This section becomes visible in case the block has been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus Cmd Touch Cmd Turn Coil 0 i i Switching State Input 0 ae iD 0 Of Delay min E ModbusTCP Slave The list box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with Cmd Touch This binary signal is written by the switch block to the slave It is ON as long as the operator touches the corresponding visualization element light symbol Cmd Turn This binary signal is written by the switch block to the slave It becomes ON in case the block tries to turn on It becomes of in case the block tries to turn off In case the function c
58. can be adjusted in the Visualization Element Room Temperature Sensor In case Provide Setpoint for Temperature has been activated an additional input pin appears Resets the temperature setpoint value or the setpoint correction value gt An ON command on this pin resets the setpoint value if the temperature setpoint is an absolute value then it is reseted to the medium value of the setpoint range see Range Setpoint Temp if the setpoint is a correction value x then the value is reseted to a correction value of 0 Similar behavior for humidity in case the sensor also measures humidity Range Setpoint Temp 50 amp Typically there is no temperature indication at the turning wheel for the temperature set point adjustment on the sensor device Therefore the interpretation of the position of the wheel by means of what temperature does it correspond to is done by the valve actuator In case the room temperature sensor is linked to myHomeControl then the interpretation of the position of the turning wheel is done by the room temperature sensor block The block sends an absolute set point value via the corresponding output pin to the network The range for the set point temperature can be adjusted to your needs A small range allows smooth set point adjustment at the wheel The parameters shown above enable the user to set corresponding values to get a accurate temperature indication for the temperature set point wit
59. checks in This can be done either at the PTM radio button in the garage or at any of the PTM radio buttons entrance door or corridor Function Ha Activation The ON command activates the presence simulation block This informs the system that all inhabitants of the building are absent An OFF command deactivates the block This informs the system that somebody is present in the building If the absence function is activated via this pin then it delay first actions for about 15 seconds This gives the user the opportunity to deactivate the function in case of a missoperation before the absence funtion processes the first operations e g lowering all blinds Ot Presence Any command ON or OFF deactivates the block Immediately after the activation of the presence simulation this pin will be locked for about 30 minutes This avoids unexpected deactivation of the simulation during the house will be left In case the presence simulation has to be deactivated during the 30 minutes use the Activation input oa He Absence Whenever the block will be activated it sends an ON command through this pin and vice versa an OFF command when it gets deactivated S Lo Control output for the jalousies In the evening the illuminations will start 5 minutes after the jalousies have been lowered In the morning the illuminations will stop 5 minutes before the jalousies will be raised MESSE Sequence output Through this pin the illumination comma
60. command through its output pin This is a sensor block and has to be teached This block provides the individual logging Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 06 00 01 Window Contact Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Application sample gt Refer to Window Monitoring Page 287 287 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Window Contact Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Modbus Function Channels optional Ef Name Window Contact 28 Product Generisch Fensterkontakt ModbusTCP Slave Slave se i This section becomes visible in case the block has B Aiah aaa i S State Input 0 ge Dh been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus ModbusTCP Slave The List box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with State This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block Window Handle The Window Handle block evaluates radio messages transmitted by an EnOcean PTM230 Modul It forwards the actual position of the window handle Simulation The window handle block provides 4 different outpu
61. counter value of a hour meter block The visualization element records minima and maxim values as well as a trend There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area Refer to chapter Hour Meter to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the temperature sensor from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area Touch the symbol with a fingertip to open the additional information dialog This dialog shows minimal and maximal temperature values and the trending of the temperature I O 00 5 Appearance Digital Indication Na Soa Heater Operating Hours p O 00 00 00 Appearance Text Hester Gelee Hours Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot H and adapt it to the situation Page 99 99 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Color of the Display There is a configuration option to configure the color of the text according the counter value Following table defines the threshold values and the corresponding colors Threshold values and colors Treshold level Color The configured color is used for the text as long as 0 01 00 00 the counter value is between the threshold value in the same row and the threshold value on the next 0 01 00 00 ema D KM
62. floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation The chair is occupied Page 63 63 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Picture There is the opportunity to define an individual image for each state occupied free Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area fl Visualization Element Receive analog This visualization element is used to show analogue signals of a controller Refer to chapter Receive analog to find details about the network functionalities There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the temperature sensor from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area Touch the symbol with a fingertip to open the additional information dialog This dialog shows minimal and maximal temperature values and the trending of the temperature Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the Ze O o floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation 0 0m s There are various signal types e g brightness wind speed available The signal type has to be selected in the settings of the corresponding network block Color of the Display There is a
63. for different web pages e o d Base Wi Settings Rename create web page add section lt Beside the floors and rooms there is an additional structuring tools called section and subsection available Sections can be mixed up with floors and rooms within the oo Be WEB page This gives freedom to design the structure of Sa De the web page according the needs Delete Additional setting are available for the web page itself and dedicated item Web page settings TT http localhost EEX Name Condensed Representation v Append new objects automatically Lil Add link for this Url on index page Pass Request password for internet clients only Condensed Representation This setting enables a condensed view of the page Behavior If a floor or a section gets selected by the user then all other floors and sections will be hidden If a room or subsection has been selected by the user then all other rooms and subsections become hidden The purpose of this setting is to avoid scrolling within the browser Append new objects automatically If this setting is checked then myHomeControl is going to maintain the web page automatically according to the changes of the project structure This means if the user inserts a new devices in a certain room myHomeControl automatically inserts the device at the corresponding location of the web page This setting is useful in case the
64. gt Device sends Button 1 pressed UC Button1 released gt Device sends Button released not which button J ger Direkt Button2 pressed gt Device sends Button 2 pressed GN GW U8 230V T 2 Button2 released gt Device sends Button released not which button GN GW R8 230V T 2 Button pressed gt Device sends Button 1 pressed Button2 pressed gt Device sends Button 2 pressed Button1 released gt Device sends Button released not which button Button2 released gt Device sends Button released not which button In case both buttons have been pressed and the first is released then it is not possible to determine which of the buttons have been released Therefore it is not allowed to press both buttons at the same time Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 272 272 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH PTM Radio Button 8 This element represents a 8 fold PTM Radio Button or a 8 fold wireless transmitter unit It serves as container for 8 Single Channel PTM Radio Buttons Each behaves like a single PTM Radio Button Device specific hints Eltako F8S12 This device is shown in myHomeControl as 8 half PTM radio button blocks The I O polarity of the buttons is given be the device A1 A3 A4 A5 E1 E3 E4 E5 To teach in the devices address activate the teach mode one of the button blocks Then operate one of the pysical buttons The individu
65. in the garage in the example below This button activates the absence function When the absence function is activated then all lights connected to the presence simulation output pin are going to be turned off by the block _ Entrance Bedroom Temp dis A Setpoint Temp 21 0 Presence simulation The block calculates for each day the time of sunrise and sunset The light will earliest be switched on after it is dark outside Additionally a sleep phase might be specified During the sleep phase no lights will be turned on Page 164 164 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Ki At sunset the block sends a command via the output pin to lower the blinds It shall not be visible if somebody is in the room where the lights will be switched on or not A few minutes after lowering the blinds the presence simulation block will start illuminating lights in different rooms It starts in a randomly chosen room and will activate the lights for a time range of 5 20 minutes Then the block moves further to the next randomly chosen room and activates the lights there After a time range of 10 60 seconds it switches off the lights in the first room The block continues like this illuminating the lights in all attached rooms In case the time of sunset is later then the start of the sleep phase the jalousies will be lowered at the time of start of sleep phase In case the time of sunrise is before the end of the sleep phase the jalo
66. maximal counter value will be recorded Press the button to reset the stored values resets the counter value to 0 Page 109 109 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH J Visualization Element Run This visualization Element enables the user to start a windows application e g the internet explorer Refer to chapter Run to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Appearance Buttons Press the button to start the application configured in the network block Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 110 110 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH h Visualization Element Scenes This visualization element enables the user to activate stored scenes The scenes can be teached by driving all the scene participants into their desired state After the setup of the scene press the corresponding scene activation button for about 5 seconds until it changes its color to yellow to store the new setup of the scene There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area Refer to chapter Scenes to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Open the control dialog of the scenes visualization element with a fingertip to activate a scene for your convenience In the design mode you have to click the symbol for about 3 se
67. myHomeControl may send out alarms using e mail SMS or phone calls The alarm condition may be formed as desired e g if in case of absence a window is opened Remote Control myHomeControl may be remote controlled using the local network the Internet or mobile phones myHomeControl is free programmable The programming is done graphically and doesn t request any programming skills Page 2 2 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Table of Content EVE OG Leid Le BE 2 What is myHomeControl geed 2 Table 9f e 3 MSU SS ae scan aa een ee ana hai Era E 10 Installation of the transceiver radio gateway 10 Starting myHomeControl nen 11 Vis alizat on RE En EC 13 The first Network E 15 Teach in of Encean devices 23 SMAO E 24 Operational Tee Eege 26 ODSEIVER IN o eege 28 Stari WiN EMPIV de E 30 It Eed 31 Release NOTOS EE 32 FR ES ON ON ica ct ent a i i dem we ne bln dene EAE 37 Remote Control using a WEB BrowsSet cccscssssseeesesesseeeeseeeneseeeeeeessseeeseoesseeeeeooesseeseoenseessenenseneees 37 Remote Control within the local area network Client Server ua220 02a2000020nn000nnnnnonnnnnnn 37 Remote Control via Internet 2 42220202220020a0n00n0nnnu0nnnnnnunnnnnnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 38 Team WG WS T aing r ee ee ra ne ee re a re ee een 38 Welle CN 41 Hints to create picture resources reenn 42 General Controls uu2 22002
68. of Steps Target Step Round Robin Up Automatic Forwarding He SS GR m vw active last event Activation Action No Action Detain Aiono aion After a delay of 15 minutes 900 seconds the block changes automatically form step 1 to step 2 Due to the activated round robin it will step back to step 1 after an other 15 minutes No times are configured for step 0 After a reset command will the block stay in step O until it receives a step command The sequence block supports the Activation Feature o Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks The sequence block supports the Activation Feature d Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 227 227 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH H Setpoint The set point block stores two individual set point values In case it receives an ON command on its input pin it sends the first set point value to the succeeding blocks In case it receives an OFF command it sends the other set point value w active last event Ee ee Application sample The Buttons provide manual operation of the dimmable light 2 Incase the occupancy sensors detect presence of a person it sends an ON command to the upper set point block The set point block sends the 70 value to the dimming actuator block The dimming actuator block switches on the light and lights it up to 70 3 The dimmable light is also included in the presence simulation function If the dimmable light wil
69. pages of the visualization Animate Elements Activates different visual effects like the fading of the lights This may consume too much CPU power on certain computers or may delay the screen refresh using remote access Therefore this effect can be disabled Page 312 312 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Display time of Control Dialogs Il Tail ae Display time of Control Dialogs secs 10 kV Control dialogs as the one show on the left side close automatically in case they stay idle for the duration set in the input field above Wt LI EM These setting is valid for all control dialogs closing automatically Incase a control dialog closes before it becomes visible on a mobile phone due to the delayed screen update the display time of the control dialogs must be enlarged For details refer to Remote Control via Mobile Phone Dimmer brightness control slider indication mode Menu Visualization Logging Dimmable lights might be configured either as dimmer or as switch refer to the properties dialog of the dimmer block Switches cannot be dimmed via the command input of the network block Only switching on and off is enabled In case the Switch option is has not been activated then dimmers can be switched on and off as well as dimmed via the command input of the network block The brightness of all dimmable lights is individually adjustable by the brightness control sliders also
70. position of the door based on moving times These are properties of the block and have to be measured on site If additional remote control units will control the door then the block will not be informed about the movement of the door Therefore additional sensors will be required lt is recommended to install at least a position sensor for the position closed This ensures the indication of the position closed of the visualization element A window contact sensor might be used as position indication sensor Page 186 186 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH State indication The door is open Position 0 indicates a completely open door The door is closing Position 28 indicates that the door has moved 28 of its driving range to the closed position The door has been stopped at position 54 which is nearly in the middle of the Paai driving range 5 open is close The door is closed Position 100 indicates a completely closed door The door is opening The door controller block supports the Activation Feature D If the block is deactivated then it will ignore any commands Signals received from a position indication sensor will be processed independent of the activation state The block will update its internal position estimation in any case Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Door Controller
71. receives the radio message as well It forwards the received command to the Jalousie actuator The Jalousie actuator receives the command via its observer input pin Therefore it doesn t generate a radio message to the real Jalousie actuator It only adapts its state and starts the position interpolation After expiration of the movement time it sends out a radio message to the real Jalousie actuator to stop the lowering Subsequently is sends the radio messages to adjust the blend In case of a crash of the PC running myHomeControl defect or virus attack the lowering of the blend will not be stopped by the PC anymore but the blend is still fully operational directly by the radio button This means the elementary functionality is still available even in case of a PC crash The PC is just performing the convenience functions Page 29 29 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Start with empty project F Initial Startup What would you like to do New Project a O Start with an empty project O Start with an empty project an open help Recent Projects D Haus Elektro deen mg HomeControl Home Project_ Richiger Home 20081012 71P D mHomeCantrol Admin Kunden Einzelinstallationen H nni Project_lMyNeufeld ZIP D myHomeContro Admin Kunden WEB Shops Baterielos de web IT Project_Constant Light C D mHomeConrtrol Admin Kunden Einzelinstallationen WWeber Andreas Project_Sollwertumsch Actual project of last version
72. remaining switch off delay time Blocking ON The phys switch actuator is turned off the switch actuator block is in state ON In case of unblocking the phys actuator is going to be turned on Blocking OFF The phys switch actuator and the switch actuator block are in state off The phys actuator will not be turned on in case the block receives an ON command Compare with the Dimmer as well Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization element Switch Actuator 1 Syntax of the scene values as they can be set within the properties dialog of the scene block 0 Switching actuator will be switched off in case the corresponding scene has been selected 1 Switching actuator will be switched on in case the corresponding scene has been selected gt The state of the switching actuator will not be changed in case the corresponding scene has been selected Used EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of EnOcean Equipment Profiles EEP used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block uses following profiles Configuration 2 Rocker Switch 05 02 01 Light and Blind Control 4 Rocker Switch 05 03 01 Light and Blind Control Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Page 150 150 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Device specific hints teach in Funkstuhl 4511
73. represents an actuator based on a RCM120 module This block is just for experimentation purposes The values shown by the block represent the byte values transmitted by the BS4 telegram This block generates radio messages which can be received by a RCM120 module This block has to be teached to a real RCM120 module ATTENTION Regard that D3 0 is the indication to mark a telegram as a LRN telegram Keep D3 1 in normal conditions Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 147 147 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 1 Switch 1 This block represents a single channel switch actuator This block will also be used to represent a channel of a multiple switch actuator Single channel Switch Actuator One channel of a multiple lt Name of the multiple switch actuator channel switch actuator lt Name of the channel This name appears in the visualization Function This block sends radio messages to a physical switch actuator device This block has to be teached to a real switch actuator Command input gt Observer input gt Blocking input gt D Name Ss The output pin indicates the Product EnOcean RCM 250 actual state of the switching actuator If can be connected Addr to a Consumer Monitoring Block 1 Off Delay min Off Warning o gjon Delay Min _ invert _ button following mode Blocking enable Consumo In case the switch actuator block changes its state to ON due to an ON com
74. stron acion ee This block supports the Activation Feature Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 185 185 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Door Controller The door controller block controls automatic door like garaging doors entrancing doors etc It tracks the actual position of the door This information serves as base for the door visualization element which indicates the actual state of the door Command input for the door gt Sensor signal gt Sensor signal gt Activation input gt Move Time open sec Move Time close sec m active Deactvaton Acton No Action Function This block is primary made to control automatic door openers Therefore it generates one or two pulses which force the door opener to open or close the door The pulses will be sent to switching actuators The block supports following control modes Up Down Pulse There is only one pulse input available on the door opener It reacts on pulses corresponding to the following pattern open stop close stop open Up Pulse Down There are individual pulse inputs for opening and closing available on the door Pulse opener There for two switch actuators will be requested or a double channel type The control mode Up Pulse Down Pulse is the preferred one In this control mode the reaction open of close of the door opener is always certified The block simulates the actual
75. symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot d and adapt it to the situation Color of the Display There is a configuration option to configure the color of the text according the counter value Following table defines the threshold values and the corresponding colors Threshold values and colors Treshold level Color The configured color is used for the text as long as the counter value is between the threshold value in the same row and the threshold value on the next rOW rm In the sample shown on the left side a counter value of 6 would be written in green lt 0 D Fi Appearance in the general controls area Fan starts a Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the tab Depending on type of the RoomTemperatureControl and the property settings different additional information s will be shown Page 108 108 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Following supplementary information is available The visualization of this information is configurable Fan starts A picture Fan starts u E 02 02 97 fd i 0 on Sd The minimal and maximal value 15 22 222001 e ER ER dr i SET Since BL LT Les L A Additional information dialog 4117 The actual counter value will be ell Min Max recorded and presented in form of u r a trending diagram since 03 02 2097 10 59 I Also the minimal and the
76. the ON OFF commands of the door and window sensors Forward ON Cmd Forward OFF Cmd invert _ strip key press duration information Dei tses m Lol acte lastevent Bun Denn The right filter block is active only during the absence of the owners Only in the active state it will forward the commands of the occupancy sensor and the left filter block to the SMS block The SMS block requires general email settings Refer to the options page Email SMTP Serve POPS Server User name Posner GN Page 360 360 myHomeControl Koo ELD GmbH Forwarding of an alarm message to all PCs of the network Problem statement An alarm message shall be sent by myHomeControl to all PCs connected to the network The message shall be shown on all PCs immediately after transmission Solution To achieve this behavior a additional application has to be installed on the PCs receiving the message as well as on the computer running myHomeControl This application is required because the NET SEND command is not longer supported by Windows XP SP2 and Vista An opportunity for this kind of application is Message Bob This tiny program replaces NET SEND To run Message Bob use the Run Block i Name Firealarm 2 6 File C Program Files 6c86 Message Bob Message Bob exe Arguments send Fire has been detected in room 2 23 E Create Window In case the block receives an ON command on its input pin it starts the a
77. the block send an ON command through its output pin Further details especially configuration items are shown in the description of the visualization element Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Clock The block supports the Activation Feature D Load Limitation The Load Limitation controls the power consumption by turning off and on electrical consumers This feature is useful in case the costs for electricity are related to power as well or in case overload might be sanctioned by the power supplier Blocking command to the switch actuators Signal input for the actually consumed power gt Sampling interval in seconds gt Function A set of time conditions might be configured The Load Limitation function considers these time conditions and the actual load to determine which consumers have to be blocked or released There is the opportunity to connect up to 20 Switch Actuator blocks to the Load Limitation function The switch actuator blocks will be turned off step wise from the top output pin to the bottom output pin to control the load In case other consumers are going to be turned off load becomes available and the Load Limitation function releases blocked switching actuators again This is done from the bottom to the top Page 201 201 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample Clock B mon 14 04 Off Counter 1 44 2 kh Load Limitation
78. the emulation of the position of the jalousie As soon as the jalousie reaches the shading position the jalousie actuator block sends a stop command to the jalousie actuator and subsequenily the adjustment commands The PTM button lowers the jalousie to is lower end position darkening position The commands of the shading block lower the jalousie to a middle position shading position UPJZ2NO1 Sin f Additional application samples Automatic Shading Automatic Shading and time controlled blind movements Used EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of EnOcean Equipment Profiles EEP used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block uses following profiles Configuration 2 Rocker Switch 05 02 01 Light and Blind Control 4 Rocker Switch 05 03 01 Light and Blind Control Page 141 141 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Device specific hints Teach in Eltako FAB12 Settings AUTO3 WA 0 RV max Eltako FSB61NP 230 Settings GS4 lower rotary control Select a time which is longer then the blind or jalousie requires to run from one end to the other Eltako FSB12 Teach in myHomeControl Eltako FSB12 39 10 old devices OPUS GN A R12V JGR 2 Teach in RV 10 for Channel1 RV 30 for Channel2 WA LRN AUTOS Now press button send of the settings dialogue Normal operation RV 200 WA 0 1 AUTOS Devic
79. the properties dialog of the element Corresponding input filed will appear if the appearance Indication has been selected Switch actuator block in state Blocked Refer to Network Switch 1 for details Select an icon indicating the on state of the light Tet Il r n IHG on stale Off Ilcon Text Ir E Text shown in the off state Activates flashing in the on state and defines the Flashing Interval sec interval indicate Of Delay Select if there shall be an indication if an on or off delay is in progress indicate On Delay ten A dot in the lower left corner of the icon is indicating that a delay is in progress s off delay L on delay Select an icon indicating the off state of the light Page 84 84 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appearance Panel Chose an individual symbol for each state on off Give individual texts for each state This appearance supports the flashing mode If flashing mode is activated the color of the symbol will alternate between the ON color and the OFF color as long as the actuator block resides in the ON state This feature can be activated in the properties dialog of the element Corresponding input filed will appear if the appearance Indication has been selected Appearance specific configuration Appearance Panel On _ Select an icon indicating the on state of the light pe Trensnen Text Or Text shown
80. those configured in switch mode To indicate the user the availability of the brightness control slider the appearance of a slider symbol may be configured g Dimmer Slider indication mode The following configuration item sets up the appearance of the slider symbols none The slider symbol will not be shown at all Dimmermode only The slider symbol will only be shown on dimmable lights not configured in switch mode Dimmermode and Switchmode The slider symbol will be shown on all dimmable lights Logging This group provides configuration of the different recordings Record state changes and events Menu Settings Logging Record changes states and events Max file size of recording MB Activates the recording of received and transmitted radio messages changes in block states etc These recordings will be stored into the Logging mdb database This requires a certain space on the hard disk of the system The maximum file size will be limited according to the setting If the maximum file size for the Logging mdb has been reduced to a value smaller then an existing Logging mdb the existing Logging mdb will not be reduced to the given value But it will not grow any more If the used disk space should be released then stop myHomeControl and delete the Logging mdb file At the next start myHomeControl will create a new Logging mdb This file will not grow more then the given maximum file size Page 313 313 myHomeContr
81. unlimited unlimited vi vi vi unlimited Load management Temperature lowering Blind management v SN IN v XML file for data exchange SQL data base run third party applications ModbusTCP German English Dutch Italian Portuguese Russian local net Internet mobile phone vi vi v graphically v Page 33 33 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Design rules TODO Lights Switch actuators Dimmers Shading Jalousie actuator Heating Room Operating Panel Valve actuator Boot p cmon Page 34 34 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Project organization myHomeControl stores the actual project within following 3 individual SQLite databases Project s3db This database contains all project object such as visualization elements and blocks with there settings and states It also contains all pictures Logging s3db This database stores all events of the sensors e g rocker push button switches temperatures etc It stores all state changes of the actuators as well Weather s3db This database stores all data related to weather information Trends s3db This database stores all data related to trends All state changes will be currently updated within the databases This open database structure enables an easy connection to other systems During startup myHomeControl loads the project from these databases If the user is going to save the project then myHomeControl p
82. user indicates that the jalousie has reached its lower end position The jalousie block measures automatically the periode in time used to drive the whole way down Page 142 142 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Froduct Eltako FS5B61NP Addr O1h A Position 100 darkening DrivingTime ms shading DrivingTime ms 1000 Tilt Time ms is darkening is shading Enable the locking feature invert Observer The button Calibration Run enables the time measurement As soon as the button is checked the calibration function the button presses received from the input pins of the block If required the jalousie might be drived up in the upper end position This will not start the time measurement If the jalousie is commanded to drive down the measurement starts This is indicated by following symbol As soon as the jalousie has reached the lower end position the user has to press the button of the rocker push button again to indicate that the jalousie is down This stopps the measurement of time and the block copies the measured time value into the input field accordingly This is indicated by following symbol Now the Calibration Run button can be released If the settings dialog is closed then the button releases automatically Page 143 143 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Modbus Function Channels optional 1 Name alousie 1 Product Generisch Jalousie g
83. well as a profile trend There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area Refer to chapter Temperature to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the temperature sensor from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area Touch the symbol with a fingertip to open the additional information dialog This dialog shows minimal and maximal temperature values and the trending of the temperature Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot 2 and adapt it to the situation Color of the Display There is a configuration option to configure the color of the text according the temperature value Following table defines the threshold values and the corresponding colors Threshold values and colors eshold level Color 2 The configured color is used for the text as long as the temperature value is between the threshold value in the same row and the threshold value on the next rOW In the sample shown on the left side a temperature value of 6 would be written in green r EN Appearance in the general controls area out temp e Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the tab 15 9 Depending on type of the RoomTemperatureControl and the property settings differen
84. xx yy as duration value 2 1 times the sampling interval before the end of the accepted duration the Load Limitation function is going to block consumers to solve the overload situation The factor of 2 1 enables the Load Limitation to block additional consumers in case the first blocking step didn t solve the overload situation Page 204 204 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The cell Pause defines the minimal duration where the load must be within legal conditions before it may raise to overload situation again The cell Active indicates if the actual overload situation fits the corresponding condition The cell time left indicates in case the condition is active for how long the overload will be accepted In case the condition is not active the cell indicates the rest ant duration of the pause The Or block supports the Activation Feature D Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Maximum This function evaluates the largest value of the values of all connected signals This block supports the Activation Feature Application sample Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 205 205 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH x Minimum This function evaluates the smallest value of the values of all connected signals This block supports the Activation Feature Application sample Additional application samples Handling Blocks Proper
85. you delete a block reference block surrounded by a dotted line the block will only be removed Page 122 122 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 from the actual room but still resides in its origin room All connections to the blocks in the actual room will be removed Connections Pins Properties of Blocks All the blocks provide a properties dialog to setup the block This is useful to adapt its behavior to the actual situation 2 Product EnOcean RCM 250 bai 2 Cm Off Delay min On Delay Min _ invert _ button following mode Hover the mouse over the black rectangle which is the property symbol to open the properties dialog The dialog will pop up automatically Close the dialog by clicking on the exit button 2 Opens the blocks help Opens the dialog to enter device type and location information EJ Closes the dialog Background coloring In certain situations the background of the network block is colored a means not licensed this block will not be executed a means not fully configured no address has been assigned to this block or no sensor has been assigned to this block In case of virtual devices e g PTM Radio Buttons the checkbox virtual has to be checked in the address edit field This removes the background coloring and conforms to the configuration check function Page 123 123 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Pins The blocks provide different types of p
86. 00000000000nnn0nn nun nnnunnnnunnnnunn ann nn nun nn nnnnnnunnnnnn mann nn nun nn nnn nn nun mann nn ann nn nun nn nun nun 43 The Design e e TE 44 Insert visualization elements into the Operational areas cccccseeeccecseseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeeesnaeeeees 45 Location selection and alignment of elements 2 220002222000220nnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 45 The Presentation mode 222022200n000nnnu0nnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnn nun nun nnna 48 Automatic return to the main page n nnnonenneonannnsenneosnrnnnrnrrrsnrrnsrnrrrsnrrrsrnrrrnnresnnrrrsnreronnrrrsnrerrnnnrenne 49 Visualization ET CT CN 50 Lr Visualization Element Zoom ENEE 51 Sensor Visualization Elements ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeseeeeaeenenseeseeneeeenaeeeaeeceaseneseeneeseaeeeasesnass 52 EJ Visualization Element Briobtness kkt an kk ankn ankkaa nnkankan reann an rrenan 52 Visualization Element Camera 54 Y Visualization Element Counter 7 55 Page 3 3 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Tx Visualization Element Electric Meter 56 Visualization Element Keycard Switch ccccccccccccsssseeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeceeeeeessaaeeeeeeeesessaagaeses 57 Visualization Element Leakage ccccccscssecccseseeeceesseeccesececsaeeecceseeessaseeecsageeeeseseeessaseesssaeess 58 Visualization Element Presence Indication u 59 E Visualization Element PTM Radio Butt
87. A Swifel Door top view 4 Sectional or Sliding Door Horizontal front v List of the available appearances Switel Door front view core JI Uta Garage Positron Position of the visualization element within the floor horizontal verica in Depending on the chosen appearance supplementary properties will be shown in this area A picture might be selected as texture for the door Page 97 97 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Swivel Door frontal view closed Control dialog Swivel Door top view as in a floor plan closed a pm En HE pm IE mp HE DE HE HE DH HE FH HE DH DH Em n Em a pm a pm p pm Horizontal Sectional Door or Sliding Door frontal view Control dialog Vertical Sectional Door or Roller Door frontal view closed Control dialog Boot Up cmon Properties Texture of Door Properties Texture of Door Direction of movement Properties Texture of Door Direction of movement Properties Texture of Door Direction of movement Page 98 98 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Vertical Sectional Door or Roller Door top view as in a floor plan closed Control dialog Properties Texture of Door Direction of movement Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Visualization Element Hour Meter This visualization element shows the
88. Acknowledge the request to open the help with no Fa A a 7 myHomeControl File Er Visualization CT Network CG asts Flogging Options S i eet New Floors Rooms and Devices H Sensors Actuators D Logic Monitoring Ex AM Allgemein Used Floors Rooms and Devices Ep Geschossname 2702 05 15 55 46 First of all a floor has to be defined Drag a floor from the tree view new floors rooms and devices and drop it into the left workspace area click the floor symbol with the left mouse button an move the mouse with the clicked mouse button to the left workspace area and release the mouse button there Next step shows how to place Visualization Elements Page 11 11 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 BZ myHomeContral File Er Visualization Ei Network Gast SLogging Options S i Floor Identifier Allgemein Floor Identifier Floor Identifier Background Image Pasitiar horizontal d al vertical Width 108 Height Adapt Size automatically C Center Obfuscation Design Mode Fresentation Mode EI OFFLINE Rx Tx 2702 08 16 03 16 Boot Up cmon Presentation View gt gt Password Sensors 8 Actuators Logic Monitoring Ep Floor Lo Room Used Floors Rooms and Devices Erf Floor Identifier To open the property dialog hover the mouse over the black rectangle The property dial
89. Cmd _ strip key press duration information Dl bse u v active last ewent heron eon Deactivation hen Aaron Sw Function The filter block provides following functionalities Forwarding of ON commands Forwarding of OFF commands Inverting commands ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON Converting Key press Commands into commands without key press information converts a key press into a corresponding ON OFF command ignores key release Delaying commands In case ON and OFF commands will be forwarded then both command types will be delayed as configured In case only OFF commands will be delayed then they will be delayed as well But in case the block receives an ON command it will reject a delayed OFF command pending to be sent Vice versa if only ON command will be forwarded Interrupt if it is deactivated it will not forward any commands The filter block supports the Activation Feature Page 191 191 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Application sample If the lights in the corridor will be switched on then the lights at the entrance shall switch off after 5 seconds Forward ON Cmd _ Forward OFF Cmd _ strip key press duration information Ply bec m v active last event strain cen e on The filter block only forwards ON commands It inverts the ON commands and delays them by 5 seconds Properties of the filter block Properties In case Forward ON Cmd is checked the block forwards ON command
90. Command to control blinds various sensor inputs gt Activation input gt It calculates the actual position of the sun The properties dialog provides different forms to define the geometrical characteristics of the building und the windows Concerning the position of the sun and the geometrical information s it is able to define the best times to lower or raise the jalousies One single central brightness sensor may inform the shading blocks about the intensity of the sun Temperature sensors may be used to optimize the shading process as well Application sample Each shading block evaluates its own criteria s if lowering or rising of the jalousies shall be performed Buttons The block provides 2 buttons on its surface These buttons are used for simulation test purposes to simulate either a lift event or a lower event I Page 230 230 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Tab Thresholds ge Name Beschattung 20 Thresholds Dimensions Orientation State Brighiness Ty WS iod 32000 Wind m s 2 5 Temperature 22 07 2011 indoor max 2U 0 Sun Rise 08 05 SR fee Sunset 20 06 indoor min 23 0 max Elevalion 537 outdoor 20 0 dl Average of the outside temperature 224 Note the maximum values of the last X days d V EI Time frame at the earliest 1 Sei S at the latest 25 ka UU S Blocking time for next mov
91. Control File New Floors Rooms and Devices Tx 09 01 08 14 02 10 To create a connection click first the corresponding source pin The pin will change its color to red Move the mouse to the corresponding sink pin Whenever the mouse hovers over a compatible sink pin the pin will color red Click the sink pin to terminate the connection process To leave the connection mode without defining a connection just click somewhere in the empty workspace area To delete a connection click first the source pin then the sink pin Pins Commands List of all connections Page 125 125 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Commands Commands will be generated by blocks and forwarded though their output pins If there is a successor block connected to this output pin then it receives the generated commands The switching actuator block receives the commands from the PTM block via the connection Lo Forwards commands to the connected blocks There are following commands Commands carrying key press information v ONv Indicates an I key has been pressed ONA Indicates an I key has been released OFFv Indicates an O key has been pressed OFF Indicates an O key has been released TOGGLEv This command is generated by a toggle block It forces the consumer block to change its corresponding state It indicates that any key has been pressed TOGGLE Indicates any key has been released
92. F command at the input of the valve actuator block disables the valve actuator block to send response telegrams to the valve actuators request Summer operation mode To spare battery power during summer time the valve actuator is set into summer operation mode during the summer In this mode the valve actuator reduces its periodical request to 1 per hour The clock block is used to activate the summer operation mode Page 356 356 myHomecontoo MONE ors Solution2 myHomeControl Temperature Controller myHomeControl Temperature Controller calculates the setpoint values for the valve actuator by evaluating the various sensor signals Clock We 20 04 2071 On The radio communication between the valve actuator and the valve actuator block myHomeControl is driven by the valve actuator itself The valve actuator sends periodical radio signals 10 Minutes indicating the actural state of the actuator Subsequenty the valve actuator block myHomeControl sends the actual temperature value setpoint value and command information to the valve actuator Therefore a new setpoint e g new position setpoint will be transmitted from the valve actuator block to the valve actuator at the next communiction interval Then the valve is going to update the valve position according to the setpoint The feedback of the valve position is then sent back to the valve actuator block at the next communication interval This means in worstcase
93. FU E ST KKF Funkstuhl 451FU E m Wi KKF Funkstuhl 451FU E m Wa KKF Eltako FSR61NP FMS61NP Eltako FAA12 12V FSA12 12V Jager Direkt GN A R12V SR4 Eltako FSR12 12V DC Boot p cmon The switching actuator block has to be teached as a RockerButtonSwitch Set slider to the middle position The switching actuator block has to be teached as a RockerButtonSwitch Press LRN twice The switching actuator block has to be teached as a RockerButtonSwitch Press LRN twice The switching actuator block has to be teached as a central On Off Teach in myHomeControl The switching actuator block has to be teached as a central On Off Direction switch Teach in set channel number at lower wheel turn middle wheel to position LRN To send the teach in telegram do not use the send button of the properties dialog of the switch actuator block Use the button on the surface of the block instead Click the button once for ON Turn middle wheel away from LRN and back Click the button once for OFF After teach in lower and middle wheel to position AUTO upper wheel to position ES RT In case the actuator works in opposite state check the Invert checkbox in the properties dialog of the block If observer input is used rocker push button has to be linked to the actuator as well Teach in set channel number at lower wheel turn middle wheel to position LRN Operate corresponding rocker of rocker push but
94. H myHomeControl x x x x Vista C Documents and Settings lt USER gt AppData Roaming BootUp GmbH myHomeControl x x x x The files in the sub folders Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl are part of the myHomeControl installation and will be installed by the installer These files will be removed in case of a uninstall The files located in the subfolder of Documents and Settings contain the project data These files are user specific and will therefore not be touched by the uninstall or upgrade of myHomeControl The storage location of the project files depends on the user logged in into the system lt USERS gt refers to the user actually logged in Therefore different users may maintain there own project Depending on the user actually logged in myHomeControl loads the corresponding project There is the opportunity to keep different version of myHomeControl installed at the same time Each version refers to version specific folders either for program files as well as for the project databases x x refers to the version The sub folders Program Files and Documents and Settings differ between different Windows installations especially between different languages Refer to chapter Project organization Print The print feature is available from operating systems version Windows Vista on Page 36 36 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Remote Control Remote Control using a WEB Brows
95. Keycard Switch The Keycard Switch block evaluates PTM200 radio telegrams The PTM 200 module which is operated by a Keycard This device type is usually used within hotels Keycard Switch Name Keyeard Switch ajx Product E sae Delay OFF cmd sec Function If the keycard is going to be pushed into the switch then the block sends an ON command to its output pin If the keycard is removed then the block sends an OFF command to the output pin The sending of the OFF command can be delayed parameter Delay Off cmd sec State indications Keycard is not inserted The block sent an OFF command Keycard Switch Keycard is inserted Keycard Switch e The block sent an ON command Button s The button in the middle of the block enables to simulate insertion of a keycard This is just for testing purposes of the network If the block receives a radio telegram form the real chair it immediately updates its own state to the reported state This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e similar to Profile Light Switch Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Find details about the corresponding
96. LAN oder Zu Hochgeschwindigkeitsinternet Folgende DNS Serveradressen verwenden Bevorzugter DNS Server 132 169 71 0 71 Enter a corresponding IP address which are in the same subnet then the addresses given by the DHS server Test Start an Internet explorer on an other PX Enter the IP address of the host into the address field of the explorer accept the installation of the Active X Page 382 382 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Remotedesktop Webverbindung Windows Internet Explorer alala Full screen doesn t work GO einen 165 1 200 sneb U gt Select a resolution We dr BB r remotede usraos Eremot x Mr EI Gey e pe gt Establish connection Windows Remotedesktop Webverbindung Geben Sie den Namen des zu verwendenden Remotecomputers ein w hlen Sie die Bildschirmgr e und klicken Sie auf Verbindung herstellen Gr e Miel KE Nachdem die Verbindungsseite ge ffnet wurde k nnen Sie diese zu Ihren Favoriten C anmeldedeinformationen angeben hinzuf gen um schnellen Zugriff auf den gleichen Computer zu gew hrleisten Verbindung herstellen Account at DynDNS The Internet provider changes the IP address given to your DSL modem router from time to time This address can be seen in your DSL modem router but is usually unknown Therefore create an account at DynDNS www dyndns org This is free of charge DynDNS manages IP addresses
97. Mux blocks Page 351 351 myHomeControl Ir Name Trigger Tresholdlevel 9 Hysteresis _ invert ety ee m vw active last event Activation Action Deactivation Action No Action Boot ep cmon Page 352 352 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Jalousie Blinds Automatic Shading The weather station measures the brightness at a central point The individual sun light situation of the different windows is calculated by the shading blocks according the actual position of the sun and the geometric of the building The shading blocks control the shading input of the jalousie actuator blocks Consequently the jalousies will move to the shading position 20 5 Setpoint Temp 21 07 a Beside the position of the sun the shading blocks also consider different other threshold values to control the jalousies Which of the threshold values will be considered depends on the connected signals e g in case a brightness sensor has been connected to the brightness input of the shading block then the threshold value for the brightness will be considered automatically The shading is understood as enhancement to the room temperature control Therefore the various temperature signals will be connected to the shading blocks Page 353 353 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH E3 The shading block considers the threshold values for brightness in and out temperature Refer to the description of the shading Brightness 5 l
98. OFF command has been sent trough the output pin of the block Funkstuhl This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e similar to Profile Light Switch Page 274 274 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Radio Chair Application sample Additional application samples Lights in office controlled by radio chairs Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Modbus Function Channels optional D Name Radio Chair Product Generisch Funkstuhl gt ModbusTCP Slave Slave 1 This section becomes visible in case the block has y State input 0 been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus Of Delay sec ModbusTCP Slave The List box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with State This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block Page 275 275 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH gt Receive analog This block receives data from a physical device or a c
99. PIR101 Sensor provided by Omnio supports two types of command outputs For details refer to the corresponding datasheet Occupancy only channel 2 will be forwarded to the command output pin Occupancy and Brightness channel 1 will be forwarded to the command output pin Page 268 268 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Occupancy sensor providing additional information as brightness temperature and supply voltage 21E3 accept only LRN Message Simulation E Occupancy E Occupancy Button Brightness lux 0 510 lux 10 0 LS del Un Delay sec Of Delay sec Dn Je P Select the corresponding sensor type and kind in the properties dialog of the block The block sends an ON command if somebody enters the monitored area Depending on the setup of the sensor hardware device the OFF command will be sent if the person leaves the monitored area or if a delay time expires Refer to the manual of the sensor for details of the specific behavior Additionally to block provides delays for the commands send by the sensor The property On Delay defines the time how long an ON command sent by the sensor to the block will be delayed until the block feeds it in into the network The Off Delay works for the OFF command accordingly lt Presence output pin lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed Buttons The button simulates presence of an object The first click simulates the entrance of an object into the mo
100. T S 4 Gei Load actual project of last version ProjectiHomeControl eather This window appears if myHomeControl starts up with an empty project This is typically the case if myHomeControl has been installed the first time or after the installation of an update version Choose one of the following options Start with an empty project myHomeControl starts with an empty project Same happens if the cancel button has been pressed Start with an empty project and open help myHomeControl starts with an empty project It opens the help as well and leads to the chapter First Steps which gives an introduction into myHomeControl Load an existing project myHomeControl loads the selected project and restarts Load a demo project myHomeControl loads the selected demonstration project and restarts Load actual project of last version X X myHomeControl copies the actual project from the folder of the old installation into the folder of the new installation updates the project to the new version and restarts Page 30 30 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Infrastructure Following figure shows a typical topology Remote control Alarms AN 28 2 myHomecControl SR www myHomeControl ch Add Brain Not Wires Modem eg ya Multimedia e EN ZF WLAN IP camera enocean ga radio BE station l OCCUPANCY aga EIN KS s Gateway E Meter D V
101. Window open e Window in tilt position gt E All Windows closed Signal input for window handles gt Command input for window contacts gt Activation input gt Alarm output Page 244 244 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The output pin indicates an alarm When the block leaves its internal all Windows closed state an ON command will be sent through the alarm output pin The Properties dialog lists the open windows and the windows in tilt position separately A delay time might be given to delay the generation of the alarm Only if a window stays open or tilt for a longer period then the delay time the alarm output will be activated State indications Windows closed All windows are closed Window s in tilt position At least one window is in tilt position but none is open Window s open At least one window is open but there might be some in tilt position as well Connect all window sensors to the corresponding window monitoring block Page 245 245 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The sample above shows a simple alarming logic It sends a sms message in case a window is opened if all inhabitants have checked out nobody is at home Find details about the corresponding visualization element in Visualization Element Window Monitoring Additional application samples Create and play an text message audio Page 246 246 myHomeControl Versio
102. a of the properties dialog define the behavior of the observer input In case is shading has been activated the block reacts on an observed start move command to the physical jalousie actuator by starting its position estimation and starting the shading driving time After the shading driving time has expired it generates a stop radio message and sends it to the physical jalousie actuator Then if required the block generates the adjustment messages In case the jalousie was stopped somewhere in between and a new start was given the residual driving time will be calculated depending on the estimated position of the jalousie Page 138 138 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH In case of driving up this means opening the jalousie the driving time will be increased by a few seconds This certifies that the jalousie reaches its upper end position This compensates position estimation errors Windmonitoring feature Purpose of the windmonitoring feature is to raise the jalousies automatically in case of strong winds There is the opportunity to connect a wind signal of a weather station to the jalousie block Therefore check the option Enable Windmonitoring An addition input pin is shown where the weather station might be connected The jalousie gets raised as soon as the strength of the wind increases the given threshold value In this case the jalousie block locks any lowering commands from the network and the visualization
103. acks the current set of databases into a ZIP archive The user is asked to name the archive and to select a location to store the archive In case a new project will be created then the current set of databases will be overwritten by empty databases Only one project is active at a time In case an existing project will be loaded then myHomeControl unpacks a ZIP archive selected by the user and overwrites the current databases by the ones taken form the archive Before the current set of databases is going to be overwritten myHomeControl saves them to a backup archive Page 35 35 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Files and Folders myHomeControl stores the related files in following folders English Windows installation Program files C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl Vx x nnnn bin Application sample pictures C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl Vx x nnnn DemoPics Application sample projects C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl Vx x nnnn DemoProjects Text und product resources C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl Vx x nnnn Resources Data sheets C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl Vx x nnnn Resources DataSheets Drivers for devices and gateways C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeControl Vx x nnnn Resources Drivers Project databases Project s3db Logging s3db Weather s3db Backup archives ZIP XP C Documents and Settings lt USER gt AppData BootUp Gmb
104. ading angle parameters left and right define the purple angle range Left and right apply to the vision out of the window Page 233 233 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Tab State Following roules have to be fullfilled to automatic lover the jalousie s Brightness above level Rain Wind speed below level In and out temperature above level Sun in vertical shading angle Sun in horizontal shading angle at the earliest at the latest Blocking time for next movement Min_ Block is activated z SSS ose aa a State of the jalousies Activation m active last event This tab shows the actual states of all the conditions Gray conditions are not evaluated becase there is no sensor connected to corresponding input pin As soon as all conditions are fulfilled the jalousies will be lowered Page 234 234 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sound This block plays audio files Two individual audio files can be assigned One to the ON event and the other to the OFF event The audio file for the ON event is played in case the block receives an ON command on its input pin The audio file for the OFF event is played in case the block receives an OFF command Name Sound 28 ON Event CAmyHomeCortonPRO E3 X gt OFF Event C myHomeContral PRO D h active last event Actvaton Acton No Action No Action This block supports the Activation Feature In case the block is in deactivat
105. age 106 106 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH a Visualization Element PIN This visualization Element is used to operate the PIN function The PIN function might be used to request the user to input PIN codes Refer to chapter PIN to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Appearance in the general controls area PIN Following dialogue appears if the user is requested to enter the PIN code 8 e Please enter the PIN code Page 107 107 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Pulse Counter This visualization element shows the counter value of a pulse counter block The visualization element records minima and maxim values as well as a trend There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area Refer to chapter Pulse Counter to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the temperature sensor from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area Touch the symbol with a fingertip to open the additional information dialog This dialog shows minimal and maximal temperature values and the trending of the temperature Appearance Digital Indication Geechosenat sr Star LI Fan starts Appearance Text Place the
106. al device addresses will be assigned to all of the blocks automatically Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element PTM Radio Button 8 Page 273 273 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Radio Chair The radio chair sensor block evaluates PTM200 radio telegrams The state of the block corresponds to the state of the energy bow Fi Name 450FU BLS KKF Product Funktechnik AXEL DI RRE urteached Deals Off Delay sec The Properties dialog offers the opportunity set a delay for the OFF command If the value is gt 0 then the block delays sending of the OFF command in case the chair becomes free This is useful to keep the lights on for a while after the chair has become free The radio chair sensor block provides 1 output pin The block sends out an ON command in case somebody sits down on the chair And vice versa it sends an OFF command in case the chair becomes free State indication ON OFF Button s The button in the middle of the block enables to simulate occupation of the chair This is just for testing purposes of the network If the block receives a radio telegram form the real chair it immediately updates its own state to the reported state State indications Chair is occupied There is somebody sitting on the chair An ON command has been sent trough the output pin of the block The chair is free Cp e Nobody is sitting on the chair An
107. an be enlarged within the global settings to increase the operation time of the control dialogs RDM RDM functions similar to TeamViewer but there is a Mobile Phone client RDMH is not for free There are license cost depending on the type of mobile phone of a single charge of about 20 40 The advantage of RDM against TSMobiles or VNC is its independency of firewall and modem router settings Therefore RDM is the recommended solution Installation Installation on the PC running myHomeControl browse to www rdmplus com select the corresponding Mobile Phone type upper right corner browse to the download site install the Desktop part for windows and follow the installation procedure RDM is now running as a service on the PC Installation on the Mobile Phone Follow the instructions in the Getting Started Guide Page 39 39 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Operation Visualization The PC running myHomeControl can also be used for other purposes e g as mail server as common diary or as music server for the whole family If the screen is located close to the entrance or the phone each member of the family has easy access to myHomeControl and can check the actual situation myHomeControl is running in one window presenting the visualization screen This screen can be configured to show floor plans containing visualization elements indicating the actual state of lights blends and temperature sensors a
108. anel has been teached to myHomeControl and the valve actuator block has been teached to the physical valve actuator Clock We in 90 30 Off Name SRO4P Product Thermokon SRO4P Addr unteached accept only LRN Message Temperature Setpoint Mode Omnia RTF103 Temperature Setpoint Fan Speed Occupancy Button Temperature Setpoint Fan Speed Slider Switch Temperature Setpoint Fan Speed Temperature Setpoint Occupancy Button edit Setpoint Temp Simulation Temperature The range for the temperature set point has been selected in a small range of 17 to 23 This allows smooth set point adjustment with the turning wheel on the room operation panel The set point value sent from room temperature sensor block to the valve actuator block is always an absolute temperature value Page 157 157 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Name SRC DO Product Thermokon SRC DO Typi PWM gt Temperature Setpoint Temp Correction Temp Lowering The valve actuator block scales the temperature values received from the network into appropriate values for the valve actuator Especially the absolute set point value is scaled to a relative value based on the base temperature Additional application samples Interrupt heating in case a window has been opened Proportional Heating Valve from Kieback amp Peter U
109. at the area is free The two filter blocks separate the ON and OFF commands of the occupancy sensor d r Name OFF delayed _ Forward ON Cmd 7 Forward OFF Cmd _ invert strip key press duration information The OFF commands will be delayed Den u v active last event Activaion Action Deinen oem v Page 348 348 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH l Ir Name Trigger The trigger block monitors the brightness signal from the occupancy Treshold level sensor to be beyond the threshold level Hysteresis The trigger block activates deactivates the ON filter ise accordingly Delay sec m active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action E None Die only in case it is activated This Forward ON Cmd means ON commands will only be _ Forward OFF Cmd forwarded by the block in case the brightness is below the threshold SE l value strip key press duration information ely sec The ON filter forwards ON commands _ invert m v active last ewent Activation Action No Action Deactwation Achon No Action The PTM button enables manual operation Page 349 349 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Constant light control The illumination of a room shall be controlled according to a brightness sensor measuring the outside brightness Therefore the room is split up in different zones The illumination will be controlled for each zone individually 5 P
110. bH Universal controller Thermokon SRC ADO BCS The following 4 Samples use the same device for different applications The various outputs of the controller will be used in different cases Temperature Control The outputs DO1 and DO2 drive individual thermo dynamic valve actuators Because the various outputs of the universal controller are going to be used for different applications the blocks SRC ADO Valve 2 and SRC ADO Valve 3 have not to be teached to the controller Page 369 369 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Thermokon ships a configuration software with the universal controller Select the operation mode for the channels i SRC ADO configuration software eo E thermokon Sensortechnik GmbH unused k el Sensor ns Sg unused a Is Digital outputs Page 370 370 myHomeControl Configure the channel i Controller Pl heating with PWM behaviour Digital output 1 Parameter Sensors Sensor parameter Min sensor measuring limit C Max sensor measuring limit C Boot Up cmon x Output Read I Heat Temperature Offset C Set point adjustment C FF 5K w With temperature failure gt output General parameter Nighttime reduction C Running time comfort a Min control variable limit at Antifreeze C Period time min Select the same range as in the actuator block and the sensor block within myHomeControl 1 D
111. bove Teach in myHomeControl The switching actuator block has to be teached as direction switch Teach in set switch actuator block in state OFF by clicking the button on its surface usage as 2 separate channels select position 9 for channel 1 at upper wheel 10 for channel 2 usage as 1 combined channel select position 5 at upper wheel turn lower wheel to positon 2S turn middle wheel to position LRN To send the teach in telegram do not use the send button of the properties dialog of the switch actuator block Use the button on the surface of the block instead Click the button once for ON After teach in middle wheel to position AUTO In case the actuator works in opposite state check the Invert checkbox in the properties dialog of the block If observer input is used rocker push button has to be linked to the actuator as well Directly linked PTM rocker switches to the swicht actuator und usage of the observer input Page 152 152 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH FM312 12W 2 FMS12 12W Schaltaktor FMS12 12 Schaltaktor 1 KI Attention During teach in of a PTM rocker switch to the switch actuator the actuator stores the frist pressed button as an ON command independed if a O button or an button has been pressed If the switch actuator block react in opposite manner to the observer input insert an inverter block between the PTM rocker switch block and the switch actuator
112. cgi mjpg video cgi camera amp showlength 1 amp resolution 352x288 Frame rate The update of the pictures may require some CPU power Especially USB cameras require a considerable amount of CPU power Therefore the load must be checked and should not excess 50 The frame rate should be reduced accordingly Visualization Element Find details about the corresponding visualization element in Visualization Element Camera Page 255 255 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample If the bell button has been pressed at the entrance door the visualization dialog of the camera pops up automatically The user sees who is ringing the bell In case the visitor is welcome then the user presses the button open door which is located on the visualization dialog as well This opens the entrance door and enables the visitor to come in Check Enable On Button to activate the on button on Enable recording Operator Buttons the visualization Palio tire rected Enable On Button dialog of a ra Tel Enable Off Button camera Thais E A enables the user to Time period for recording secs 10 Enable Motion Detection operate the door e SES opener _ Record on motion Act Motion Level Treshold Level 0 050 m 7 active last event Activation Acton Wo Action Deactivation Action No Action Addr Off Delay min I lela EILEEN oT Activate button follower mode to turn on the inver actuator uring e butto
113. commands between the blocks individually to avoid message jams in the transmit queue of the gateway This feature shedules forwarding of commands to the succeding blocks e g shading block gt jalousie actuator block in the way that radio messages can be transmitted with accurate timings One effect of this feature is that the blinds will not be lowered synchronoulsy They start at individual points in time cascading The shading block shedules the start points in the way that never two jalousie actuator blocks are requested to send a radio message to there linked jalousie actuator at the same time The system detects automatically where cascading is required Disable Editing This button locks some editing features as moving connecting or disconnecting blocks This feature is helpful in case block settings shall be changed with the finger on a touch screen Clicking on a block directly opens the settings dialogue Page 128 128 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Send only LRN telegrams This feature is helpful in case actuators have to be linked teach in This button should be checked during any actuators are in teach in mode This feature avoids unexpected teach in of radio messages created by myHomeControl Keep in mind that myHomeControl may send radio messages automatically at any point in time e g created by a clock timer function etc 1 Name RCM 250 HS Product EnOcean RCM 250 Add OA u Radio m
114. components of the web server open a port to be accessed from the network This requires a reconfiguration of the fire wall Usually windows shows a reconfiguration dialog when the web server is executed the first time EE I Die Windows Firewall hat einige Funktionen dieses Component private public Programms blockiert access access Einige Features von HomeControl wurden in allen ffentlichen und privaten Netzwerken von der Windows Firewall blockiert Name u e myHomecControl M O Pfad D myhomecontrol project_v 12 homecontrol pin debug sqlite homecontrol exe Kommunikation von HomeControl in diesen Netzwerken zulassen Abyss Web Server VM T V Private Netzwerke beispielsweise Heim oder Arbeitsplatznetzwerk W isi S i ssi i s i irewall gt Network infrastructure required gt Setup web pages gt Smart phones e g the IPhone used as a remote control gt Smart phones e g the IPhone used as a remote control Page 292 292 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Network infrastructure required This chapter describes the required network infrastructure for different CompactWEB applications In case CompactWEB has been enabled and the built in WEB server has been started then myHomecControl is going to publish WEB pages which can be browsed by any browser WEB Server myHomeControl Network A participant of the network may browse the WEB pages via the network LAN The network componen
115. cond channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 2 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter switch 2 to find details about the network functionalities 4 Visualization Element Switch 4 This visualization element represents a quad switch actuator This actuator is a combination of four single switch actuators When you drag in a switch 4 icon a switch 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the double switch actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Gd ground floor Ed upper floor Gg downlights 4 1 east 5 4 2 west 4 3 middle ei To insert the second channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 4 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter switch 4 to find details about the network functionalities 8 Visualization Element Switch 8 This visualization element represents an 8 times switch actuator This actuator is a combination of 8 single switch actuators When you drag in a switch 8 icon a switch 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the double switch actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Page 86 86 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH d ground floor Ed upper floo
116. conds a pulse with a width of 2 5seconds is generated At the start of the pulse the block sends an ON command via its output at the end of the pulse it sends an OFF command 75 every 10 seconds a pulse with a width of 7 5seconds is generated 100 no pulses are generated output is set to ON The range for the input values is 0 100 Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 240 240 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Toggle The toggle block processes either only ON command or only OFF commands This depends on its setup On each processed command the toggle block sends out a TOGGLE command This block is useful in case a light should be operated with only one button of a PTM radio button device Name Toggle regard ON cmds regard OFF cmds m 7 active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action Function The toggle block processes either only ON command or only OFF commands On each processed command the toggle block sends out a TOGGLE command This advises the successor blocks to change there corresponding state The filter block supports the Activation Feature Application sample The upper button of a single channel PTM radio button shall operate the down lights in the ceil the lower button shall operate the floor light Properties The properties dialog offers the opportunity to setup the block to either process only ON commands or only OFF commands
117. conds until the control dialog will pop Control dialog Activate the scene of your convenience with a fingertip on the corresponding button If you press the button for about 5 seconds the states of the scene participants will be read back by the scene controller and will be stored as new set point values of the scene teaching Page 111 111 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Properties dialog Ral Name Scenes Geschossname Scenes Appearance Buttons Independent of the scene names given in the networks you may name the scenes individually for the presentation view The checkboxes below the glasses symbol define if the corresponding scene button is visible Hidden scenes are activated via the corresponding input pin of the network block Appearance in the general controls area Scenes e Activate the scene of your convenience with a fingertip on the corresponding button watch TV If you press the button for about 5 seconds the states of the scene reading participants will be read back by the scene controller and will be stored as new set point values of the scene teaching Page 112 112 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Cl Name Scenes Geschossname Scenes Picture Button Text dinner relax night Indicate selected scene Boot p cmon Properties dialog Independent of the scene names given in the networks you may name the scenes individually for the presentatio
118. configuration option to configure the color of the text according the value Following table defines the threshold values and the corresponding colors Threshold values and colors Treshold level Color The configured color is used for the text as long as the temperature value is between the threshold value in the same row and the threshold value on the next row In the sample shown on the left side a value of 6 would be written in green lt 0 D Fi r Appearance in the general controls area This element can not be placed in the general controls area Additional information dialog Page 64 64 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 16 1 e 07 07 0007 0 0 u Reset Minima 1 6 1 e 09 01 2008 Maxima since 07 07 0007 Boot Up cmon The actual value will be recorded and presented in form of a trending diagram Also the minimal and the maximal value will be recorded Press the button to reset the stored values Page 65 65 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Bool Up GmbH o Visualization Element Room Temperature Sensor This visualization element represents a room temperature sensor unit It shows the actual temperature measured by the unit Depending on the configuration it also shows the set point setting and the selected operation mode of the unit The visualization element records minima and maxim values as well as a trend There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area Ref
119. ct PIN Otherwise it stays in the original state Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element PIN Page 212 212 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample This sample shows the principle of an security function A Sensolux occupancy sensor is used to detect motion within a room In case the sensor detects motion when the security function has been activated then a indication light shall blink and the user shall be informed by an SMS The signals received from the occupancy sensor will be forwarded to the security functions in case the filter block arm alarms has been activated The activation of the filter block is done by the PIN function When the user leaves the building then she he arms the security functions by locking the PIN function in the visualization The PIN block sends out an ON command via its output pin This activates the filter block and the filter block forwards all signal received from the occupancy sensor to its successor blocks When the user returns he she disarms the security functions by unlocking the PIN function Therefore he she is requested to enter the correct PIN code If the PIN code has been entered correctly then the block changes to the unlocked state and sends out an OFF command to the filter block This deactivates the filter block and no signal will be forwarded anymore Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Pag
120. ctivation Feature Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Clock Additional application samples Access to home Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 176 176 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Communication Monitoring This blocks monitors the communication status of various communication medias e g EnOcean or Modbus communication lt Communikation ok Function The block monitors all configured medias for communication break downs If all selected medias are ONLINE the block sends out an ON command at its output pin otherwise it sends an OFF command Configuration All medias enabled in the general settings appeare as a checkbox in the properties dialog of the block Enabled Media Modbus TCP PEHA PHC The medias to be monitored by the block have to be checked F EnOcean fj 7 Modbus TCP a 0 E Delay OFF cmd sec Enable logging Duration of recording per file DD HH MM 1 00 00 In case short interruptions shall not raise an alarm condition then delay the OFF command This block provides the individual logging Application sample If communication breaks down then the block sends an OFF command This command gets inverted and triggers the SMS block to send a message to a technician Page 177 177 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH gt gt Consumer Monitoring This blocks monitors if any electrical consume
121. d in context with the Load Limitation function In case the Blocking has been enabled an additional pin appears Cp This pin might be used to block the actuator The input field Consumption becomes active as well Enter the estimated Consumption e g power consumption of the device controlled by the switch actuator The input field Consumption is required in case the actuator is controlled by a Load Limitation function Blocking The switching actuator block might be controlled by a Load Limitation In this case the Load Limitation block has to be connected to the blocking input of the switch actuator block The blocking input overrides the state of the switch actuator block Behavior o o o OFF at blocking input pin OFF blocked OFF at blocking input pin OFF blocked ON at command input pin ON blocked Page 149 149 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The on and off delay functions operate accordingly State indication The actuator is in the OFF state An OFF command has been sent through the output pin The Actuator is in the ON state An ON command has been send through the output pin The Actuator is in the ON state the switch off delay function is running Indication of the remaining switch off delay time The Actuator is in the OFF state The actuator block has received an ON command and awaits the end of the on delay period After the period it automatically switches on the actuator Indication of the
122. device has to be combined with a PHC Radio Interface of type 940 FU C from PEHA A It serves as a container for 12 single channel Jalousie actuator blocks 1 Each channel of the quad jalousie actuator acts like a single channel jalousie actuator 950 JRM S40 FUG E lt Represents the whole device lt Represents the first channel lt Represents the second channel The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually and more Settings On the PHC Radio Interface 940 FU C select address 01 on the dip switches All Jalousie 1 actuator blocks have to be teached to the 940 FU C individually PHC Funk Interface Channel Jalousiemodul Motor Number Jalousiemodul Output M O1 up OO down KEE M O7 up O6 down M 0 1 2 6 7 8 9 M M O13 up O12 down M ES CE OTM Bu IX me e rg M Refer to the manual PHC Compact Additional Information for further details To open this document click right mouse button on the block representing the whole device then click the datasheet menu O16 down O19 up O18 down Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Jalousie 12 Page 146 146 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH RCM120 This block transmits BS4 telegrams If
123. dimmer following the rules defined by the central command dimming EEP 07 38 02 This solution doesn t support the ramping times defined in the EEP Oh Name SRC ADO BCS Product Thermokon SRC ADO BCS Down Ramp sec Page 373 373 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Select the operation mode for the channels i SRC ADO configuration software thermokon Sensortechnik GmbH Analog outputs wsd ME unused cl unused Digital outputs DO DOZ Configure the analogue channel AO3 Sensor individual Analog output 3 Parameter Sensors Sensor settings Output sensor evaluation Read F Bit V Selection data byte Databyte2 I Min output voltage W bo g With sensor failure Output Max output voltage V 10 0 Configuration Min measuring limit Bit Max measuring limit Bit Min scalling Bit Max scalling Bit a Page 374 374 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Configure the binary channel DOS i Sensor individual Digital output 3 Parameter a Sensor settings Output With sensor failure Running time s Invert relay F Read F Choose Data Byte atabyte Tum on value Bit Tum of value Bit 1 2 Teach the actuator block to the universal controller Sensor individual Digital output 3 Sensors Channel Selection Device type Sensor ID 1 u 100m operating panel SRA SROG SRO FFF29702 iz Il x amp d
124. door temperature must be above the maximal indoor threshold level 4 The sun shines into the window at the actual elevation state see tab Dimensions 5 The sun shines into the window at its actual horizontal angle see tab Orientation 6 The actual time is within the time frame 4 Activation An ON command activates the shading block an OFF command deactivates if Ben cae ULC gegen Tab Dimensions Actual Position of Sun 52 27 Eave m The time to lower the jalousies is when the sun shines through the window into the room This depends on the shading of the window by the eave and the elevation angle of the sun Therefore some geometrical aspects of the building have to be entered 0 1 m is a sufficient accuracy For a window in an upper floor estimate the values accordingly The purple angle shows the angle range within the jalousies might be lowered if all conditions are fulfilled The End Angle of Shading defines the lowest elevation angle of the sun where the jalousies might be lowered Page 232 232 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Tab Orientation Besides the shading of the window by the eave also the orientation of the window has to be taken in account This dialog provides the configuration of the bearing of the window Sufficient accuracy is about 5 15 If the horizontal angle of the sun is within the purple angle range then the horizontal lowering condition is fulfilled The two sh
125. dresses to enable myHomecControl to address the transceivers individually Line State check The button indicates the communication states A click on a button initiates a communication check di Clicking the symbol gives access to additional settings of each transceiver ele Geet Aeneas To modify the Id Range Base the gateway has Sw Version V2 080520 004 to be set in LRN mode Press the corresponding buiton in the gateway PELL SES FFFFFAOON FFFFF200 The INFI Functions are not yet implemented Consider that after changing the base address 10 times this function will be blocked by the gateway x The x buttons in the column delete the corresponding transceiver entry Page 325 325 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Transceiver Assignment Within this section the transceivers will be assigned to the floors For details refer to the chapter Floor assignments Page 326 326 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Thermokon EasySens This settings have to be set in case bi directional sender receiver gateway s of type EasySens STC Ethernet or unidirectional receiver gateway s of type EasySens SRC Ethernet shall be used This kind of gateways will be connected to the Ethernet port of the PC Therefore it can be integrated into a PC Network The ability to operate the gateway within a network allows to operate several gateways in parallel e g one on each floor zul ae n Network Switch G
126. e Appearance in the general controls area livingroom Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the tab 20 4 o Depending on type of the RoomTemperatureControl and the wen property settings different additional information s will be shown D 20 0 Following supplementary information is available The visualization of this information is configurable livingroom e Minimal and maximal temperature 20 4 90 0 m 20 0 20 An 09 01 2008 ys E CO singe livingroom 8 The temperature profile as trending diagram 20 0 Z D 20 0 Page 67 67 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Additional information dialog Min Max Temperature o 18 11 2010 0 0 2207 24 o 13 11 2010 reset F 08 47 since 18 74 2070 22 07 mil Min Max Temperature Reference Curve Temperature setpoint curve 21 0 ml ll Boot Up cmon The values on the left hand side shows the actual temperature and the temperature setpoint value used by the heating control If the temperature reference curve as shown in this sample has been enabled then the temperature setpoint is calculated by the reference setpoint curve and the setpoint offset wheel at the physical sensor The actual temperature and the set point setting will be recorded and presented in form of a trending diagram Also the minimal and the maximal temperature will be recorded Press the button to reset the stored values The val
127. e 213 213 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Pulse Counter This block counts pulses and monitors the counter value against a threshold value If the counter value is above the threshold value then it sets the alarm signal otherwise the alarm signal gets cleared Pulse input gt Counter Value Threshold level gt Reset gt Activation input gt lt Alarm output Function The block counts always upwards this means counting starts at 0 and counts up to xxxxxx The block counts either ON or OFF commands which it receives by the pulse input pin The counter value might be reset by an ON command on the reset input pin As soon as the counter values reaches the threshold level the block sends an ON command on the Alarm output After the reset it sends an OFF command The threshold value can be set eiter by the corresponding Threshold level input pin or in the block configuration dialoge Properties Name Pulse Counter Treshold level regard ON cmds regard OFF cmds Activation Counter Value Actual counter value The button might be used to reset the counter value manualy Threshold level Threshold level for the counter value which raises the alarm condition Regard ON OFF commands This setting defines if the block counts ON or OFF commands This block supports the Activation Feature Find details about the corresponding vis
128. e 26 26 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Solution with myHomeControl S1 radio button first floor IN S2 radio buttons ground floor X S3 radio button basement V Benefits of this solution are N ee A Boot Up cmon a L1 IS light first floor 1 tp L2 oss light ground floor n Gp L3 ee light basement EO lt is very easy to modify connections Just some clicks are required to change the relations between ration buttons and switch actuators within myHomeControl Each light might be configured with an individual switch off delay to prevent permanent light if the user forgets to switch off the light The delay can be set in the range of 1 Minute to several hours All the other powerful features provided by myHomeControl Disadvantageous is the dependency on the PC If the PC crashes no light can be switched on anymore The combined solution There is the opportunity to combine the both solution discussed above This brings in the benefit of both solutions and softens the disadvantages S1 radio button first floor N V S2 radio buttons A ground floor S3 radio button basement 7 myHomeControl e E e L1 Dt o o KS light first floor Am Pi oat L2 ese light ground floor ne were light basement Page 27 27 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Within the combined solution the elementary sensor actuator relations have been teac
129. e entered This name will be used for the scene selection button of the corresponding visualization element as well The scene block has been equipped now with a corresponding button Clicking the buttons of the scene block can activate test wise scenes A value can be given for each scene participant within each scene In case the scene will be activated the given value will be sent to the participants and they adapt their states Indeed it is not the usual way to give the values for the scenes manually There is a teaching function for the scenes but this will be expanded later or refer to Scenes Page 21 21 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH In the next step we will try to operate the defined configuration Change to the Visualization register and l l en Presentation View activate the presentation mode by clicking the button Le myHomeControl a ER Rx Tx 09 01 08 08 35 39 193 Click or touch the symbol for the scenes A control dialog pops up showing all the available scenes Select one scene by clicking the corresponding button The floor light and the blend change to there corresponding states Until now all operations have been processed virtual No physical effect could be seen To act on the real radio buttons and to control the real actuators these objects have to be teached in The next chapter describes the teaching process Teach in of EnOcean devices Page 22 22 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up
130. e in the floor plan area Drag in the window contact icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are 2 different appearances available for this visualization element Camera This appearance displays the pictures of the web cam directly on the ground floor plan The optional buttons will be shown within the picture frame Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation Picture This appearance shows a picture of your choice on the ground floor plan A click on that picture opens a dialog showing the pictures of the camera The optional buttons are located on the same dialog Dialog of the visualization element which pops up in case the camera symbol has been touched Entrance x Page 54 54 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Thumbnail This appearance displays the pictures of the web cam directly on the ground floor plan A click on that picture opens a dialog showing the pictures of the camera The optional buttons are located on the same dialog u Dialog of the visualization element which pops up in case the camera symbol has been touched Entrance Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Visual
131. e jalousie will driven to a position corresponding value in case the corresponding scene has been selected 100 means lower end position gt The state of the jalousie will not be changed in case the corresponding scene has been selected Application samples A long button press on the left rocker moves the paca jalousies into the lower end position CO 0 A long button press on the I button of the right rocker m moves the jalousie to the shading position Page 140 140 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The PTM rocker button switch has been teached directly to the jalousie 1 Name UPJ230 01 ZU actuator Refer to operational GE OmnioUPI23001 E reliability CT In parallel the PTM button has also been teached to myHomecControl and the jalousie actuator block to the jalousie actuator The connection line between darkening 50000 DrivingTime ms the output pin of the PTM 0000 button and the observer pin shading 30000 DrivingTime ms of the jalousie actuator block 7 informs myHomeControl that 1000 Tilt Time ms the PTM button has been teached to the physical Observer O is darkening actuator is shading The jalousie actuator block is configured to interpret the commands of the PTM button as shading commands If the I button of the PTM button has been pressed then the jalousie actuator starts lowering the jalousie Simultaneously the jalousie actuator block starts
132. e my Home Control my Home gmail com Password W S5L Enter your account information into the Email box of the general Settings page These information will be used by the send mail send SMS and receive email blocks Quick check The account information shown above might be used for a quick check to send email The password is _myHomeControl_ Fill in the receivers email address and the subject EF Name Send Email into the corresponding fields of the email block to john pattem gmail com and press the mail button on the surface of the E block Subject myHomeContral The Report button might be used to check if the Text ae PEN mail was sent successfully Report The email is going to be sent to the receiver passing the email account given on the general settings page Check your email program to find your correct account settings Page 316 316 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH WEB Menu Settings WEB This configuration item belongs to the functions CompactWEB This group box contains the general settings for the WEB interface These settings control if web content is going to be created and how it shall look like For details refer to chapter CompactWEB Enable Compact WEB Menu Settings WEB This option enables the CompactWEB interface In case it is checked then myHomeControl creates web pages which can be browsed by any web browser The presentation of the project is compact and
133. e of considerable radio traffic It prevents the teach in of invalid sensors The sensor in question has to be operated at least 3 times within a timeframe of 2 seconds accept only LRN Message x Sensor sending messages periodically have a Al Name LRN button This button is used to initiate the Product EnOcean STM250 G transition of a_LRN message By default myHomeControl accepts for the teach in process only messages marked as LRN messages eee reeached If the sensor is not reachable the LRN button can Sri An en not be pressed In this case disable the option accept only LRN message myHomeControl accepts the next message received for the teach in As soon as the sensor block receives a radio message corresponding to its type the teached address will be shown in the field Addr There is a opportunity to enter the address manually as well Click the box indicating the value of the address in the properties dialog of the block Following dialog will be shown Page 247 247 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH fidit Address j There is also the opportunity to modify the addresses directly in the list of all devices Page 248 248 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Life Sign Monitoring some of the EnOcean Sensor send there signals on a cyclic basis Therefore they send out radio signals periodically MyHomeControl monitors if it receives the radio messages from a particular sens
134. e presence simulation realy be started Estimated Date of Return es Montag 28 Juli 2008 If an estimation for the date of return will be entered which is optional then the absence function might be able to lower the temperature set points for the different rooms for energy saving purposes Page 88 88 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH m All inhabitants logged out Nobody is at home The absent button has been pressed at last The engaged gray button indicates this This example has been configured to show a corresponding picture to clarify the activated presence simulation function absent present Properties dialog Select if button should be arranged side Fresence Simulation Buttons Side by Side by side or above each other On activates the simulation function Ficture Button Text Off deactivates the function D Haus Elektro Steu IEN You are free to name the buttons Optionally insert a picture of JO presen ground floor Presence Simulation Page 89 89 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 2 Visualization Element Clock This visualization element is directly coupled to the corresponding logic block of the network area It indicates the time of the next event released by the clock block Refer to chapter Clock to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Clock mg The clock is active and indicates the time of the next event
135. e tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area enter Design Mode gt OE JE Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the plan floor area Page 93 93 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Display This visualization element displays the values of the signals connected to the corresponding network block It provides trending opportunities for all these signals as well Refer to chapter Display to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area e All the signals connected to the Outtemperature ee block in the network area are shown Door by this visualization element The displayed names and units can be configured within the properties dialog of the network block The dialog with the trending pops up if the visualization element has been touched Page 94 94 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Configuration None Geschossname Display Appearance Appearance Digital Indicaton Trend _ Save Data Duration of Trend Position en vera Border ten Fs zept Width 214 zl Height Appearance in the general controls area Boot p cmon List of the available appearances Appearance specific configuration items Configuration of the trend see pictures below For details refer to next pa
136. e visualization element within the floor plan SES Border orizontal vam eg Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the dimmer icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area P Pick up the light at the light symbol to move it to any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot e and adapt it to the situation tee 2 m g Page 75 75 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up cmon Turn on and off the light with a fingertip on the light symbol In case the dimmer doesn t operate in the switch mode property setting in network view a slider is available to adjust the light intensity Reside on the symbol until the slider appears In the presentation mode the slider pops up immediately after tipping the finger on the light symbol v ehe u Application sample Dimming actuators supporting the EEP 07 38 02 or any STM telegrams New generation dimmer actuators supporting the STM protocol the slider button might be used to adjust the light intensity Move the slider with the finger The red value indicates the actual intensity set point Click on it to adjust it The tree buttons below the intensity indication are preset buttons By clicking one of the buttons the corresponding intensity set point is sent to the dimming actuator By keeping the b
137. ed from the local weather station myHomeControl amp Richiger Home EP Visualization Logging Eiwerper S Inside Temperature 24 3 C Humidity 33 Outside Temperature 127 C Humidity 57 Wind Speed i mis Direction z 18 11 2009 19 11 2009 20 11 2009 21 11 2009 22 11 2009 23 11 2009 11 1087 Montag 23 November 2009 7 N 2 ETN N wih i i 2 FAS 5 N Barometer Air Pressure 969 bar 18 11 2009 b Rain Speed mmih Total 88 5 mm Since 01 01 2099 Reception The page Weather becomes available if a weather station has been inserted into the project and the option Menu Weather is checked Page 302 302 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The weather station block that can be found in the network area It provides the measured values as analogue signals to connect them to logic blocks Several blocks accept signals from the weather station block Typically these blocks are able to operate even if no weather station is available See following example The input pin for the brightness might be connected to a brightness sensor The input pin Out Temp might be connected to a temperature sensor or the weather station block But all this is optional The shading block evaluates only information that is available Page 303 303 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Structuring Structur
138. ed state it doesn t play the audio files Application sample In case the button has been pressed the block plays the audio file assigned to the ON event In case the O button has been pressed the block plays the audio file assigned to the OFF event Additional application samples Create and play an text message audio Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 235 235 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Subtraction This block subtracts the value of the signal connected to the lower pin from the value of the signal of the lower pin Output A B Name Subtraction m w active last event Bien hie Descivaion aciono raon This block supports the Activation Feature Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks amp Phone Call This feature is available if the License option email SMS phone has been enabled This block processes a phone call if it receives an ON command It activates a voice mail This block is still under development Refer to send email Page 236 236 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH gt Temperature Controller This block is used for single room temperature control It manages up to 10 individual set point values It controls the temperature in aroom according the selected set point value It uses a heater to control the temperature actual temperature gt set point shift gt brightness sun gt weather forecas
139. ed to reset the counter value manualy Threshold level Threshold level for the counter value which raises the alarm condition This block supports the Activation Feature Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Hour Meter Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 194 194 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 4 Invert This block inverts Commands received on its input pin Function If the block receives an ON command then its sends out an OFF command and vice versa Following table shows the behaviour in details Refer to chapter Commands for details to the commands fempfangen genge Hinweis ow op o SO o or om o o S SO OFFS o Kommandos Schaltbefehle ohne Tasteninformation OFF OFF TOGGLE TOGGLE No inversion takes place O TI TI O TI TI Application sample Handling Blocks Page 195 195 Up GmbH myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boao Irrigation The irrigation block estimates the residual humidity in the soil basing on the actual temperature profile the actual air humidity profile and the rain fall This block might be used to control irrigation pumps Signal input for the actual temperature gt Signal input for the actual air humidity gt Signal input for the actual amount of rainfall gt 2 Activation input gt ik Name neal ys Irrigation Periode min Set Tine Residual Humiditiy 34 CT irrigating las
140. eeseesaesaevassacasseseuseesensasvadsasseseeseesestentertereaneass 206 et OPEralar Eege 208 EE 209 IC pip COMME ON E 211 NS EE 212 Pulse Counter c ccccececcscescscescsccscsccecsccessevssecsessccassessssssasesasusaesusacsusacsasausassusaesusatsasatsusateasateasatenees 214 17 PulseGen ceccccececcccscscscscsvecesescsssessasevesesescasaseresssessavavatessssssasavaveresesessasavavatereressaasavareseseseacacaveevesee 215 UW CT 217 E e T BE 218 ds ENEE 219 h SCONES ccccccccscssessessesstsssssesssssesesssesessesessessessesstssessessessesseaseateitestsisatsstestsessesieesesiessessessesiesseseeseee 220 SS VE et ee Se cect ea ee nee en een ee 222 Ee E EE 223 BEE SENG SMS sisiring sninek ieaiaia nE Eanan 224 HEEL 225 OESS 228 d Settings 229 LATT a 230 SIG EE 235 mio ie UO EE 236 ED Phone Call 236 ES Temperature Controller ccccccccccccessececcceeeseceecseeueeeeeeseesueeeeeeeuaeceeesseaueceesseaaeeceesssaageeessssageeeees 237 PE alte 241 r Cole EE 258 2 Counter 3 259 7 Control Un 260 ba Electric WIE EE 262 Ce er 1 ESE EE 264 gl TE E 266 Presence Indlcaton ankh ankh ankn ankh ank kan AAL nnn Enn Enn aana anrr annn 268 L PTM Radio Eugen 271 PIM Radio BUllon O ae ee eines une nen 273 SEET 274 PROC CIVIC ICO E 276 O Room Temperature Sensor 278 BIREN 281 i TMU STAVES einerseits ee 282 VOLAGESENEOT E E E E E E E N E E E E E een een 284 En WM SAINEIS te E 285 Page 6 6 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot
141. ement Min 15 w There is a threshold level available for the brightness If the actual brightness value is below this threshold level the jalousies will never be lowered Is the actual brightness above the level then the jalousies might be lowered There is a threshold level for the wind speed as well If the actual wind speed value is above this level the jalousies will be raised and blocked in the upper end position until the wind speed is below the level Windmonitoring feature of the jalousie block versus the windmonitoring feature of the shading block Also for the out and indoor temperature there are corresponding threshold levels available Optionally there is the opportunity to enable averageing of the outside temperature In this case the outdoor threshold level is compared with the average value of the outside temperature of the last X days This level comparison may deliver better results during morning hours compared to the level comparison with the actual outside temperature because the outside temperature raises slowly during the morning hours The actual outside temperature becomes more and more wight during the day time hours In case the Setpont Temp input pin is connected the value for the threshold level indoor max is taken from that pin If certain threshold levels are not of interest the corresponding pins must not be connected to a sensor Disabled threshold values are indicated by disabled input fields
142. ements This is useful especially Presentation Mode 40 with background pictures containing strong colors To place visualization elements on the floor plan drag them in from one of the tree views and drop them at the appropriate location on the floor plan Page 41 41 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Hints to create picture resources Following hints shall help to achive nice looking views 1 Background pictures shall be graphically brushed up The size in pixels should be adapted to the screen resolution of the target computer PC running the visualization project The resolution should be set to 7ODPI To modify the pictures it is best to use a graphic program e g corel draw or micrographics firefox 2 Visualization elements can only be placed in the area of the background picture Therefore there shold be a border around the floor plan as a spare space to locate blinds and outside lights 3 Few smart colors give a nice look and lighten the visualization elements 4 The size of the light symbols might be adapted in the main menu Settings Size of Symbols An adaption might be necessary in case a project has been ported from one PC to an other with a different resolution Page 42 42 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH General Controls Dow Anwesenheitssimulation 8 1 Anwesenheitssimulation general controls e
143. enerate pulses as long as the actual pulse count didn t reach the configured Number of Pulses value Page 215 215 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH State Indication The pulse generator is turned off It doesn t generate pulses The pulse generator is turned on It generates pulses Actually the last sent command was an ON command The pulse generator is turned on It generates pulses Actually the last sent command was an OFF command Nar so nea ms On Periode Ims m 7 active last event heiten action on Deactivation acione aon v The pulse generator generates a pulse every 5 minutes with a duration of 1 minute Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 216 216 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH w PWM Pulse Width Modulation This block generates a pulse sequence according to an analogue value value input gt lt Pulse output Function The block creates pulses at a configurable rate The width of the pulses correspond to the value received on the input Samples assuming the rate is setto 10 Seconds 0 no pulses are generated output is set to OFF 25 every 10 seconds a pulse with a width of 2 5seconds is generated At the start of the pulse the block sends an ON command via its output at the end of the pulse it sends an OFF command 75 every 10 seconds a pulse with a width of 7 5seconds is generated 100 no pulses are generated output is setto ON
144. entile Ventilator Motor Schallkasten S WS ES Bees Fancoil Controller i 7 Lights DALI Bus Lights Shading Heating conventional The topology shown above is extendable by additional EnOcean gateways as well as EnOcean repeats to best suite larger buildings Page 31 31 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Release Notes The enhancements bug fixes and the differences between the various versions of myHomeControl are documented in the release notes The release notes can be downloaded from the web site www myHomecControl ch download Security advice The software must not be used in any relation with equipment that supports directly or indirectly human health or life or with applications that can result in danger for people animals or real value System requirements CPU min 1GHz RAM min 512MB Disk min 200MB free space OS Windows 2000 WindowsXP 32Bit und 64Bit WindowsXP embedded Vista Win7 myHomeControl runs on ATOM CPU based devices e g ATOM N270 Windows Settings To optimize the appearance and the operate ability windows should be configured as follows Display DPI Settings XP Control Panel Display Settings Advanced gt set DPI to 96 ppi Win Font Size select normal font size ClearType XP Control Panel Display Appearance Effects gt activate ClearType Win USB Disable all power save features in case USB devices are used PC Settings Following setting
145. er myHomeControl provides a WEB interface Any browser can be used to access the interface Find details in chapter CompactWEB Remote Control within the local area network Client Server In case myHomeControl shall be operated from different computers e g within the same building and the WEB interface doesn t suit the requests then there is the opportunity to setup various operating stations This means there is a main station Server and a series of remote stations clients which connect to the server Example Station 1 Client i Station 2 Client Refer to chapter Multiple Operating Stations for details Page 37 37 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Remote Control via Internet There are various opportunities to control myHomeControl remotely via the Internet CompactWEB TeamViewer Remote Desktop TeamViewer is the most recommended tool for the remote access Therefore only TeamViewer will be described within this chapter Refer to the Appendix E WEB Remote Access for detail about Remote Desktop TeamViewer Introduction TeamViewer can be downloaded from www TeamViewer com It is free for private applications To operate TeamViewer no special settings required for the firewall as well as for modems routers TeamViewer works nearly in every net Installation TeamViewer has to be installed as a service on the PC where myHomeControl runs Therefore download the full version of TeamView
146. er and install it Start TeamViewer A ID will be shown which has to be entered later on when a remote control connection shall be established Open Menu Extras Options check start of TeamViewer with Windows Seta password check accept incoming LAN connections Remote Control There are two opportunities to access myHomeControl either install TeamViewer on the PC or use the WEB service provided by the TeamViewer site In case e g a laptop shall be used for remote control of myHomeControl on a regular basis then it might be recommended to install TeamViewer on that computer There is the opportunity to save the connection information ID and the password for simple and easy establishment of the connection In case a PC in an Internet cafe shall be used for remote control or it is not allowed to install software on a PC then use the WEB service This requires a registration on www TeamViewer com After the registration has been done the connection data ID password might be stored to establish the connection to myHomeCortrol easily After login the screen of myHomeControl is displayed within the browser window and all visualization elements can be operated Page 38 38 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Remote Control via Mobile Phone myHomeControl might be operated via a Mobile Phone Therefore myHomeControl s screen is displayed on the Mobile Phone On some models the display will be very compact but th
147. er to chapter RoomTemperatureControl to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the RoomTemperatureControl from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices Touch the symbol with a fingertip to open the additional information dialog This dialog shows minimal and maximal temperature values and the trending of the temperature Actual temperature Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation Depending on the type of the RoomTemperatureControl Unit additional information s will be shown N SRO4AP Properties dialog ame Geschossname SRO4AP u Simulation enables to enter values for the enable simulation different signals even in the presentation SE mode This is for demo or test purposes earn bk Configuration of the trend see pictures Trend below For details refer to next paragraph Page 66 66 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Trend If Save Data has been activated then the trend will be presented with the same data also after a startup of myHomeControl But this requires some disk space in the project database So in case disk space is very limited this option should not be activated The export button stores the logged trend values to a comma separated fil
148. ere are zooming opportunities In case the mobile provides a touch screen all visualization elements can be directly operated via the screen Dependent on the model of the Mobile Phone there are different opportunities for remote control RDM www rdmplus com Supports nearly every Mobile Phone Costs around 35 one time fee Supports remote control over Internet as well Befree4iPhone www ewe software de en download htm Supports only iPhones free of charge The update rate of the screen on the mobile phone may take several seconds 2 10 depending on the type and quality of the connection between the mobile phone and the Internet After a visualization element has been operated this period has to be awaited before the status of the element is shown on the screen Therefore fast clicks has to be avoided In case a visualization element showing a control dialog has been operated then a control dialog is going to be shown This control dialog closes automatically after 10 Seconds by default This means for the operation via mobile phone After the click on the visualization element the control dialog is shown But on the mobile phone this dialog appears earliest after some seconds lets assume 6 seconds Therefore there are only 4 Seconds left to locate the mouse and operate the control dialog buttons on the mobile phone This might be to short for a proper operation There is a setting parameter called Display time of Control Dialogs which c
149. erge reenen 220 2 lt e e ect Start Stop enable W Logging enable The Display block provides 2 input pins and 1 optional input pin Input pin for analog signals gt Input pin for Command signals gt Input pin to start and stop recording logging gt The is the opportunity to write all recorded data to a logfile Start and stop controls recording of signals for trends and logging to file An ON command starts a recording phase and an OFF command stops recording The trend graphs of all visualization elements belonging to the block show the trends of the signal values during the recording phase If recoding is stopped then the trend graphs will freeze and they show the trend of the last recording phase If the recording is restarted then the visualization elements drop the old trend values and restart the trend If logging has been enabled then the block records signal values to a log file It creates an individual log file for each recording phase The name of the log file derives from the block name The path for the log file is to be configured in the general settings page Configuration The properties dialog provides opportunities to name the signals and to assign units to the different signals Page 182 182 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Configuration of the network block Visualization Page 183 183 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH OO Name Displa
150. ersion 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sequence The Sequence block provides functionality to create sequences Function The Sequence block provides a configurable amount of output pins Each output pin corresponds to a sequence Step There can only be one step active at a time An ON command will be sent though the output corresponding to the active step The input up down is used to step to the next step An ON command steps up e g 1 gt 2 an OFF command steppes down e g 3 gt 2 Optionally round robin might be activated which forces the block to step to the first step after the last step has been activated and vice versa If a step change occurs then first an OFF command will be sent to the output pin corresponding to the old step and then an ON command will be sent to the output pin corresponding to the new step On every step the block will send an OFF command to the pin corresponding to the old step and then an ON command to the new pin The input reset activates step 0 The input step activates the step corresponding to the value Deactivation Action No Action Configuration Nr of Steps defines the amount of steps and output pins Page 225 225 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The block locks stepping up when the last step has been activated and stepping down when the first step has been activated In case one of the round robins is e
151. es produced after 39 10 Teach in RV 180 for Channel1 RV 200 for Channel2 WA LRN AUTOS Now press button send of the settings dialogue Normal operation RV 200 WA 0 1 AUTOS If observer input is used rocker push button has to be linked to the actuator as well Rocker push buttons which are directly teached to the actuator must be teached as direction switch This is a prerequisite to use the observer input in myHomeControl Teach in RV 10 for Channeli RV 30 for Channel WA LRN AUTO3 Now operate button of the rocker push button Normal operation RV 200 WA 0 1 AUTO3 PEHA 452 FU EP JR Select Function 1 select a running time larger then the real running time of the blind Fine tuning might be done in myHomeControl Settings dialog of the jalousie block Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Calibration run The driving time of the jalousies has to be evaluated manualy This procedure is supported by the calibration run function The idea of the calibration run function is to let the user drive the jalousie manualy and the jalousie block observes the operation and meassures the driving time automatically The user controls the jalousie with the local controls rocker push button in the room and drives it from the upper end position to the lower end position A long button press down starts moving the jalousie With a second button press the
152. espond to the names given in the network area Appearance in the floor plan area This visualization element cannot be placed in the plan floor area Appearance in the general controls area illuminated lights All lights and other kinds of consumers are switched off Q The house can be left now without compunction illuminated lights e The light in the kitchen is actually switched on ground floor Kitchen All lights and other kinds of consumers actually situated in the ON state will be listed in the white list box Inform yourself about the situation at a glance A click on the light symbol turns off all consumers listed in case this feature has been enabled within the properties dialog Refer to chapter Consumer Monitoring to find details about the network functionalities Page 92 92 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Design Mode This visualization enables the user to enter the Design Mode The usage of this element is required in case the presentation mode has been set to Full screen without menu bar unter der general settings because there are no Window buttons available in this presentation mode To secure the return to the design mode a pincode request can be configured optionally in the properties dialog of the element Refer to chapter Design Mode to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the door controller icon from th
153. ess if computer names are going to be used myHomeControl creates the default page where it copies the project structure into the page by means of floors rooms and devices The setup of web pages is done in the main menu CompactWEB Following figure shows a screen shot of the menu File Er Visualization EI Network CompactWEB test Lists Settings http localhost E Create Index Page for CompaciWEB CN http Aocalhost Ground A A A Bedroom ER j 3 ee L SE Er Used Floors Rooms and Devices Mike S r oe Lights inirst Sa d ek Stairs a p Lii ei Er First Basement The right column contains the same tree views for new objects and the project tree Page 295 295 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Bool Up GmbH The middle column contains the editor to design the web pages The left column contains a web browser showing the page selected in the medium column This is useful to quick check the page In case there are more then one web pages then click the link world icon to advise the browser to show the corresponding page To setup web pages the user places objects with in the web page by drag amp drop the objects from the project tree The structure of the web page can be different to the structure of the project The grouping and ordering of the floors rooms and devices might be different It also might be different
154. ess the WEB server from the Internet To access myHomeControl WEB pages from the Internet a permanent connection to the Internet is required This might be achieved by a DSL connection via a wireless modem router device dy myHomeControl Refer to chapter Remote access via Internet using a WEB Browser or mobile phone Page 294 294 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Setup web pages There is the opportunity to setup different web pages for the same project These pages can be addressed individually by a browser Samples http 192 168 0 10 lt default aspx loaded by the browser by default http 192 168 0 10 Office aspx http 192 168 0 10 Shop aspx myHomeControl creates a page Url called default aspx if CompactWEB functionality has been enabled This page will be loaded by browsers when entering an Internet address only containing a host reference by default e g http myName dyndns org or within the intranet htip X X X X X X X X means the IP address of the PC running myHomeControl In case there is a DNS server available in the local network e g provided by the router then the name of the computer running myHomeControl can be used to address the web pages alternatively Sample http home In case there is a DNS server provided by the router then there is no need to assign a fix IP address to the computer running myHomeControl The DNS server will evaluate the correct IP addr
155. essages sent out by pressing the send button of the settings dialogues will be sent 5 Top Del independet of the state of the Send only LRM SL telegrams Radio messages send by the send Of Warning button are LRM messages On Delay Min button following mode Blocking enable Consort Page 129 129 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Actuators Actuators receive radio messages and control lights jalousies valves pumps or other electrical consumers Actuator blocks represent physical actuators within myHomeControl The actuator blocks must be teached to the physical actuator to be able to control the actuator Each actuator block has its own unique address Teaching in an actuator block to a physical actuator Following steps are required to teach in an actuator block to physical actuator 1 Press the LRN button at the physical actuator gt LED starts blinking 2 Press the send button provided by the properties dialog of the block to send a teach in telegram to the actuator Off Delay min On Delay Min _ invert _ button following mode Principally it is possible to teach one actuator block to several physical actuators This is the usual way with EnOcean Sensors e g one PTM radio button shall control several switch actuators in parallel But this solution would restrict the flexibility of myHomeControl One strength of myHomeControl is the easiness to change the assi
156. essages transmitted by a temperature sensor Name Tome 2G sa Pang min Temperature max Temperature Simulation This block forwards the measured temperature as Celsius value to its output pin Depending on the type of sensor a corresponding range has to be selected If none of the predefined ranges fits the sensors behaviors then select generic and enter the minimal and maximal temperature manually This block provides two output pins lt Actual temperature as Celsius value lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed The Properties dialog provides testing features as an input field for the Temperature to simulate the actual temperature Take in account that your inputs will be overwritten by the next reception of a radio message transmitted by the sensor device This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Find details about the corresponding visualization element in Visualization Element Temperature Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 07 02 01 Range 40 C to 0 C e EEP 07 02 02 Range 30 C to 10 C e EEP 07 02 03 Range 20 C to 20 C e EEP 07 02 04 Range 10 C to 30 C e EEP 07 02 05 Range 0 C to 40 C e EEP 07 02 06 Range 10 C to
157. essveave 97 Ih Visualization Element Hour Meier 99 HF Visualization Element Irrigation ss csssssssssecsessecsesssesssessecssessvessessesssessvessessesssessesssessuesscsusesseee 101 BE Visualization Element Revpad 102 D Visualization Element e 102 Visualization Element Load Limitation c cccccsecseseccesescecescceceeceececeecsccsteecaceccseessateesatessatereaterens 105 2 Visualization Element OS tee E 106 mm Visualization Element PIN EE 107 Visualization Element Pulse Counter cccccscccsesessesescscecescececcecscecsaceecersusesacsucecatessateteavatensatteees 108 el Visualization Element BE sieegregugegegerdeeh eur eegeeteeh okee reg anna anni nn 110 h Visualization Element SCONES cc ccscssccscssecsscsssssessessessessecsesssessessessessessesssstsstessessessessesseeseesteaven 111 Visualization Element Shading cccccccccscecccscceeaeceescceenseeecccuseeeeesseusescesccseecesscceseesessccees 114 AL Visualization Element Settings c ccccccessecscsessesecsessesecseseesecseseesuceesucseseesecsesecstsstsesetststseteesseseee 117 BG Visualization Element Window Monitoring c cccssccccssseccssssesssssessssseccssssecesssescssseccssssecesssecessseesen 118 Kl le 119 Tt da e Tei LO EE 120 Er amp Floors and ROOMSG s sssscsssssccessssssesessssesesesesscscsesesscscsesesscscsssaeacsesusacacsesueatacacsesseacecsesseacsesesacaes 121 Handing NOC d 122 Page 4 4 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up G
158. et d m SI l D wenn 4 gt a gateway upper floor gateway lt is also possible to use a certain gateway for more then on floor The amount of gateways may not correspond to the amount of floors In case more the one gateway will be operated then an additional network switch will be required It is not allowed to connect all the gateway and the PC with one cable Setup of the Gateways Before the myHomeControl is able to operate the gateway it has to be configured Use Thermokons SRC_Ethernet program to setup the gateway This program is either delivered with the gateway or can be requested from Thermokon Page 327 327 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Thermokon Sensortechnik GmbH EER Firmware ber Hilfe Einstellungen Daten loggen thermokon us Ba EZ ee Zb Empf ngerliste Hetzwerkeinstellungen Beschreibung SRCEthemetIP 192 168 2140 Por a005 subnet 255 255 255 0 Gateway DoDo Server IP 192 168 2100 Port 4005 Lokal IF 1921682100 192 168 2100 Version MaE 192 168 163 1 192 168 146 1 Empfangenes Telegramm SobSSFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Direkt IF suchen DHCP Modus aktivieren Modus Frotokoll e SRL Serer o TER SRC Client UDP This program will be used to set the IP address of the gateway Enter the IP address in the field called SRC Ethernet IP In case several gateways shall be used set individual IP addresses for all gateways Second enter the IP address of t
159. et point Invert Checkbox indicating if the activation commands of the channel behaves in inverted manner The box enables the user to modify the inversion state Value Numeric input field indicating the value of the set point It enables the user to enter a set point value In case a signal has been connected to the corresponding set point value input pin then the next change of the signal value will overwrite a value entered in the input field The temperature controller block stores all set point values After a restart these values are still available active Checkbox indicating the activity state of the set point The box enables the user to modify the activity state Page 239 239 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Controller Settings i Name Temperature Controller ge PID Controller Factor Ak CH To find correct values for the controller settings is not simple for users which are not used to The wizard supports the determination of adequate values for the settings for different use cases PID Controller The output value of the PID controller are multiplied by 100 to be rescaled to values PWM The Interval defines the rate for the generation of the pulses This is the time between two pulses The width of the pulses correspond to the value received on the input Samples assuming the rate is setto 10 Seconds 0 no pulses are generated output is set to OFF 25 every 10 se
160. eter 5 to value 04 to activate unidirectional mode Set configuration parameter 7 to the desired setpoint range e g 30 means 3 0 3 0 The similar range has to be configured in the block settings as shown in the figure below EY RU110 146 Temp aay Setpoint Temp 0 0 Speed zZ O accept only LRN Message execute Reference Curve Temp Setpoint correction Range Setpoint Temp TT edit Setpoint Temp Simulation Temperature 7 Slider Enable logging Duration of recording per file DD HH MM 1 00 00 Set configuration parameter 8 to value 09 Page 358 358 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Fine tuning of the measurement The measurement cycle and the threshold value for spontaneous transmission of temperature values can be configured Adjust configuration parameter 1 measurement cycle in steps of 10 seconds 12 120s Adjust configuration parameter 3 threshold value in multiples of 0 2K 4 0 8K Application sample with a temparature controller Er RU110 145 Temp 24 6 setpoint Temp 21 07 Speed d OO Tt g eg T Page 359 359 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Security Alarm in case of window will be opened or a presence indication during absence Problem statement In case a door of window has been opened or an occupancy sensor detects motion during absence a SMS containing an alarm message shall be sent to a phone Solution 1 gt Name The left filter block inverts
161. ext reception of a radio message transmitted by the sensor device The Communication Timeout defines the period for the life sign monitoring State indications No leakage battery ok Leakage battery ok Battery bad Leakage unknown Page 266 266 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH This is a sensor block and has to be teached This block provides the individual logging Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e similar to Profile EEP 05 02 01 Light and Blind Control Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Leakage Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 267 267 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH H Presence Indication This block evaluates radio messages transmitted by a presence indication sensor PIR It supports different Types of sensors The different types of sensors provide information like brightness temperature and or supply voltage Hints to teach in devices gt Pure occupancy sensor Occupancy amp Brightness Occupancy Brightness amp Temp _ Occupancy Brightness lux 0 7000 lux Command output Occupancy only Occupancy and Brightness The
162. fails Limited access rights If uninstall of myHomeControl fails due to access rights then follow these steps 1 open windows explorer and navigate to folder C Program Files BootUp GmbH myHomeCorntrol V1 2 2 Click right mouse button on file unistall bat 3 Select menu Run as administrator 4 Accept the message from the User Account Control by clicking Yes Uninstall stopps In case Avira firewall has been installed then there is a modul avoiding uninstall since Avira update Jun 28 2011 Uninstall the module ProActive Refer to following link for details http forum avira de wbb index php page Thread amp postID 1093606 Page 339 339 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appendix A EnOcean Profiles The profiles listed below have been standardized by EnOcean They define the mapping of the data within the radio telegrams Detail can be found in the corresponding EnOcean document EnOcean Equipment Profiles This document can be downloaded from the EnOcean WEB site www EnOcean com Page 340 340 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Appendix B Supported Devices Please find a list of all supported devices under following link http www myhomecontrol ch Download EN SupportedDevices pdf EnOcean Gateways BootUp pCO BOR EnOceean Serial Protocol Vi _ _ pCi Mardsoft EasyTED EnOcean Serial Protocol Vi Omnio CCC EnOcean Serial Protocol Vi RS232 USB E BootUp RS232 EnO868
163. figuration of the filter block Page 193 193 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH H Hour Meter This block accumulates time if the signal input is ON and monitors the counter value against a threshold value If the counter value is above the threshold value then it sets the alarm signal otherwise the alarm signal gets cleared Hour Counter Signal input ON OFF gt 0 00 00 00 lt Counter Value Seconds Threshold level Seconds gt S 0 10 00 00 lt Alarm output Reset gt Activation input gt Function The hour meter starts time accumulation with an ON command on the signal input pin and stopps accumulation when it receives an OFF command on the signal input pin The actual counter value is shown on the surface of the block by means of Days Hours Mins Secs Internally the block calculates times based on milliseconds Therefore it is able to measure very short periodes in time The counter value might be reset by an ON command on the reset input pin As soon as the counter values reaches the threshold level the block sends an ON command on the Alarm output After the reset it sends an OFF command The threshold value can be set eiter by the corresponding Threshold level input pin or in the block configuration dialoge Properties Hour Counter D 00 00 00 0 10 00 00 uih Name Hour Counter Counter Value 0 Treshold level D Activation Counter Value Actual counter value The button might be us
164. g Blocks Properties of Blocks Modbus Function Channels optional p HH Name Tastenfeld 28 Product Generisch Tastenfeld gt ModbusTCP Slave Slave s A This section becomes visible in case the block Cd 0 Coil 0 FB f ee a en into the project from the tab ne EB Cmd 1 Coil 0 EB Keylock1 ER Cd 10 Coil 0 HE Keylock10 ES J gt EB Cmd 11 Coil D BH KeylockT1 SS J gt EE Nr of Button Pairs 2 ModbusTCP Slave The list box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with Cmd X This binary signal is written by the switch block to the slave It becomes ON in case the corresponding button has been pressed In case the function channel KeylockX is activated then the button changes temporary to the state pressed If the function channel KeylockX doesn t follow the state then the button changes its state back to the original state KeylockX This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the corresponding button This means if the read signal is set then the button changes to the state pressed Page 199 199 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH T gt Keystroke The Keystroke Block delays the forwarding of the key press event The button in question has to be pressed for at least the configured duration until the block forwards the corresponding key press event to its succeeding blocks In ca
165. gnal input of channel gt selection of channel gt signal input of channel1 gt Selection of channel1 gt lt Signal output In case the selected amount of channels is below 3 the channel selection input converts to acommand input An OFF command selects channel0 and an ON command selects channel In case the selected Page 172 172 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH amount of channels is more then 3 then the channel selection pin converts to an analog input pin The channel selection will be done by value 0 channel0 1 channel1 etc The input field Actual Channel defines the selected channel This is for simulation purposes The input will be overwritten by the next channel selection 0 X For each channel there is a default value This input might be either used for simulation purposes or as set points The given values will be stored to the database The channels keep there default values even after a system restart In case there is a block connected to a signal input then the default value will be overwritten by value received next Application sample Requested functionality Reduce room temperature during absence e g holidays to 15 C Normal operation Due to the selected channel 1 the AnalogMux Block forwards the temperature set point provided by the Room Temperature Control sensor to the set point input of the valve actuator Absence The presence simulation block provides a command output ind
166. gnments between sensors and actuators To keep this flexibility it is better to create one actuator block for each physical actuator device and to teach them 1 1 Application sample In the living room there is a down light above the table and a floor light in the area of the sofa The illuminated bookshelf creates a good ambiance The PTM radio switch at the entrance door should switch on these tree lights The corresponding network could look like this gt Page 130 130 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The dimly illumination of the bookshelf doesn t consume a lot of electricity Therefore it is a candidate to be included into the circle of the lights activated by the Presence Simulation The network can be modified with a few clicks without assembling actuators and teaching Manual actuator address assignment In the context of EnOcean addresses allways means EnOcean Ids The address value is allways shown in hexadecimal representation myHomeControl assigns address to the actuator blocks automatically In fact it only assigns an address offset This offset will be added to the base address of the corresponding gateway to build the physical address which will be sent to the actuator In case an already teached in address of an actuator shall be reused the address offset might be assigned manually Therefore click the box indicating the value of the address offset Off Delay min On Delay Min
167. hanges the state on each click Appearance List of the available appearances Appearance Swivel Tit Window on Appearance specific configuration items Position ER SESCH Fe of the visualization element within the floor Border Size of the element or border m The window is closed Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan J Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot 2 and adapt it to the situation m The window is open Page 72 72 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Application sample Refer to window monitoring Visualization Element Window Handle This visualization element represents a window handle sensor Refer to chapter Window Handle to find details about the network functionalities The Window Monitoring informs about the state of all the windows Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the window handle icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available for this visualization element Name Window Handle Ground Floorwindow Handle _ enable simulation If simulation is enabled the visualization element changes the state on each click Position horizontal 140 Position
168. hannel Switching State is activated then the block changes after turning on temporary to the state ON If the function channel Switching State doesn t follow the state then the block changes its state back to the original state Switching State This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block This means if the read signal is set then the block changes to the state ON If it is reset then the block changes to state OFF 2 Switch 2 This block represents a double channel switch actuator It serves as container for two Single Channel Switch Actuator Blocks 1 1 Each channel of the double switch actuator behaves like a single channel switch actuator lt Represents the whole device lt Represents the first channel lt Represents the second channel The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization element Switch Actuator 2 Page 154 154 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 4 Switch 4 This block represents a multiple switch actuator with 4 channels For details refer to Switch Actuator 2 Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Switch Actuator 4 8 Switch 8
169. hapter Visualization Element Run Additional application samples Forwarding of an alarm message to all PCs of the network Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 218 218 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Scaling This block scales analogue signals J gt Name Srs Offset Signal Received Factor last event a3 5 Beat eto Desctvaion chen cn Properties The input field Received shows the last value the block received This value will be multiplied with the value of the input field Factor and added to the value of the input field Offset Following formula will be processed Input signal Factor Offset Output signal The input field Received enables you to modify the value for test purposes The input will be overwritten with the reception of the next value from the input pin The scaling block supports the Activation Feature Additional application samples Constant light control Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 219 219 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH h Scenes This block stores up to 6 scenes with an unlimited amount of scene participants A scene stores a set point value for each of the scene participants This may involve switch actuators dimmers and even jalousie actuators If a scene gets activated it sends the stored set point values to all the participants and they adapt their state to the set point value Command inputs to activate t
170. he corresponding scene gt Activation input gt h active last event Actvaton Acton No Action Deactivation Action Send OFF Cmd Function Blocks connected to the output pin of the scenes block become automatically scene participants The input pins might be used to activate certain scenes from the network Properties dialog The mn appends a new scene Enter a name for the scene in the field which is marked blue The L deletes the selected scene The arrow keys left right might be used to reorder the scenes Page 220 220 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Participant Dining Watch TV OFF Good Night h Name Dining Watch TV OFF Good Night 2 modifiable Mi Wi Mi Wi PP next Scene none none none OFF Duration e 300 1 Szenen Ceiling 1 OH Szenen Wall D 1 Szenen Balcony 0 vn m active last event Actvaton Acton No Action Deactivation Action Send OFF Cmd Enter the scene name in the frist row The 2th row modifiable defines if the user is allowed to modify the scene values within the visualization view Especially for global scenes as e g Central OFF it doesn t make sence to allow the user to modify the scene The 3th row next scene defines if there is a following scene which shall be activated after this scene The 4th row Duration defines after which periode in time the follower scene shall be called if there is a follower scene specified in
171. he PC running myHomeControl in the filed called Server IP Set the radio buttons same as shown above Finally press the button SRC aktualisieren Page 328 328 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot ep cmon Sensors Thermokon Sensortechnik GmbH Firmware ber Hilfe Einstellungen Sensoren Daten loggen En cean ther l EnOcean Gateway Sensortechnik GmbH Einstellungen Kanal Typ sensor ID Typ censor ID Taster Ip 00115044 4 Byte Sensor 0 O00054F5 Taster Ip 00049148 ml pl CR Free Free fre Tr TT be frre Tr frre es be DT be Frei CR Im RN Em Tr CR SC RS CR SC SR CR e RS CR RS RS CR e Ce SR CR e RS CR x x bs bx Bx bx Ex e Lx Ls x Ls a TE TES ke kr kr ke kr bee je Dee bee er kr ke RSR E o Fei E ECH x x x x x e x x x e x x e x x EES Ee UE EES ES Depending on the amount of used gateways in a building the gateways have to be teached only 1 gateway The teaching is not requested All radio telegrams shall be received by the gateway and forwarded to myHomeControl Activate the EnOcean Gateway option and click the button Set several gateways In case several gateways are in operation then the radio telegrams sent by sensors have to be filtered Only one gateway should forward the sensor telegram to myHomeControl Therefore the sensors have to be teached to the gateways Each sensor should only be teached to one gateway Page 329 329 myHomeCont
172. hed directly into the actuators All convenience and special functions will be processed by myHomeControl The actuator block is equipped with an observer input pin This pin supports the combined solution Example Light mvHomeControl The PTM radio button has been teached directly to the switch actuator Within myHomeControl a representing block has to be inserted for each radio button and switch actuator The PTM radio button block has to be teached with the real radio button Then the real switch actuator has to be teached with the switch actuator block Finally the radio button block has to be connected to the observer input pin TH of the switch actuator block If a button of the radio button will be pressed the switch actuator reacts directly to the radio message sent out by the radio button This behaves totally independent of the PC and myHomeControl Simultaneously the radio button block of myHomeControl receives the radio message as well and forwards the received command to the connected switch actuator blocks following the dotted line Due to the fact that the switch actuator block receives the command via the observer input pin it doesn t generate an own radio message to the real switch actuator It only updates its state and starts the switch off delay If the switch off delay expires it sends a corresponding radio message to the switch actuator and the switch actuator switches off the light This example shows h
173. hin the Visualization Element Room Temperature Sensor _ edit Setpoint Temp In case the Room Temperature Sensor provides the opportunity to adjust the temperature set point the option above becomes visible If this option is checked then the temperature set point indication within the Visualization Element Room Temperature Sensor becomes editable This gives the user the opportunity to overwrite the temperature set point sent by the sensor device The overwritten value is valid until the set point value has been change on the sensor by means of the wheel has been readjusted Temperature Reference Curve v execute Reference Curve Range for the Temp SP Offset 30 3 0 aye ay Page 279 279 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The room temparature sensor block is able to provide individual temperature setpoint values during the day according to a reference curve This enables the system to control heating tailored to the needs of the users Therefore the visualization element of the block provides a dedicated editor to adjust reference curves 10 12 13 15 db um li ll The figure above shows the curve progression during the day 24 hours Two individual curves have been configured valid for different days of the week If the reference curve has been enabled then the wheel on the physical room c
174. his property will be read by the Load Limitation function and enables it to determine oan SE and which of the consumers shall be blocked or released in certain overload situations Priority The consumers are blocked step wise from the top pin to the bottom pin This means in case of an overload situation to consumer connected to the top pin will be blocked first The amount of consumers which will be blocked depend on the overload and the power the individual consumers are consuming switch actuator property Consumption In case load becomes available the consumers will be released from the bottom side The next blocked consumers fitting into the free load will be released For details refer to the section conditions further below Properties Consumer Page 202 202 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 8 Name Lead Lmtaton H F Conditi lt This input field controls the amount of output pins provided by the block These pins control the blocking input of switch actuators u v active last event Acivaionacion Moden EE Page 203 203 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Conditions Load Limitation Actual Load 0 3 Indicates the current consumption Actual Load Si Indication in Power Limit DI Input field for the limit Input field for the sampling interval Conditions defining the behavior of the Load Limitation function under different overload si
175. hts Usually this function is realized with a brightness sensor but it is easier and cheaper with the daylight block because it doesn t request a brightness sensor Activation input gt 06 11 gt ef sl gt 06 11 OMNUP at the latest 20 47 gt kl gt 20 47 OFFIDOWN W Activation m z active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action Function The day light block calculates each day of the year the times of sunrise and sunset It indicates the calculated time values in the column Today The calculated times might be advanced or delayed by an offset value Enter a value in the column Delay Positive values will delay the time when the corresponding command shall be sent negative values will advance the time when the corresponding command shall be sent At the earliest defines the earliest point in time to send a command at Sun Rise Page 179 179 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH At the latest defines the latest point in time to send a command at Sunset Check the box invert to change the type of command that shall be sent at sunrise and sunset Buttons The block provides 2 buttons on its surface These buttons are used for simulation test purposes to simulate either a sunrise event EK or a sunset event El The daylight block supports the Activation Feature D Additional application samples Access to home Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 180 180
176. ialog appears myHomeControl has to differentiate it the reason for the fingertip is to move the visualization element or to open the control dialog Control dialog The number of shown buttons depends on the amount of channels defined in the PTM radio button block To name the buttons use the property dialog of the visualization element Page 60 60 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Property dialog TU Name PTM Radio Button Ground Floor PTM Radio Button Button Layout Select type of buttons Appearance Select an appearance for the buttons This dialog provides an input field for each button of OFF Fic OFF Pic the PTM radio button device Type the name for the A buttons into the corresponding input field ON Bir ON Dir lt is also possible to load an image on a button a e press the corresponding picture button Position horizontal 215 E ertical SS on l S Position of Visualization Element in the floor plan Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element only represents one channel of a PTM radio button device Dragging and dropping the same PTM radio button from the tree view used floors room and devices can insert this visualization element several times Each instance of the visualization element can be configured to represent a specific channel of the PTM radio button Door e OFF The black rectangle opens the property ERSE Property dialog Channel Defines
177. icating if heating shall be activated or not In case it becomes active and the period of absence is greater then the heating up period then it sends an OFF command though the heating output This command selects the channelO of the AnalogMux The Signal input of the first channel is not connected to any source This means it keeps its default value and forwards it in case it is selected Therefore the valve actuator receives the value 15 C as set point The analog multiplexer block supports the Activation Feature CH Additional application samples Interrupt heating in case a window has been opened Constant light control Handling Blocks Page 173 173 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Properties of Blocks Average This block calculates the average value of all signals connected to its input pin Formula Output Sum of the signal values of all signals connected to the input pin signal count The And block supports the Activation Feature Application sample Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 174 174 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Clock The clock block generates time based commands to successor blocks A list of times can be defined to be processed on a weekly basis Or a list of dates and times can be defined to be processed on a yearly basis DRRRR RO orcom yao 80000 Of C annually _ Activation Function
178. ice has been connected to the energy meter If tariff is not of interest then deactivate the tariff handling If tariff handling is deactivated then the visualization element doesn t show tariff information any more A correction value can be set individually for the cumulative values of the electic meter kWh TariffO kWh Tariff1 The corresponding correction value is added to the cumulative value received from the electric meeter device The sum is forwarded to the output pin of the block Fore testing purposes there is the opportunity to simulate a consumption This value gets overwriten with the next reception of a radio telegram from the electric meter device This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 07 12 01 Automated Meter Reading Electricity Page 262 262 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Electric Meter Regard the option to establish a connection to Google PowerMeter Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 263 263 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH
179. ile As soon as it detects a new version of the file it reads the signal values from the file and forwards them to the corresponding output pins Properties EI Name File Read 28 File D tmp Dateisch Automatic Read Enable When the XML File is read the first time then the block evaluates the amount and the type of the signals Correspondingly it assigns pins to the block lf Automatich Read Enable has been checked then the block automatically rereads the file and updates the signal values in case the XML file has been updated rewritten lf Automatich Read Enable has not been checked then a additional Pin appears enabling the network logic to trigger a read of the XML file ON command During reading of the file it is checked if the signal names and types are still the same The number of signals is limited to 20 Syntax The syntax of the XML File is defined by the FileReader xsd XML Schema The schema can be found in menu gt other files gt XML FileReader xsd Remark The same syntax is used by the File Write function Page 189 189 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH File Write This block writes signals and signal values to a XML File lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt SignalCollection lt BinarySignal Name Sigl Value 1 gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig2 Value 3 1 Unit PI gt lt AnalogueSignal Name Sig3 Value 2 5 Unit V gt lt AnalogueSignal Name
180. imming actuator will be switched off in case the corresponding scene has been selected 1 100 Dimming actuator will be switched on and will be dimmed to the corresponding brightness in case the corresponding scene has been selected 100 means full brightness The state of the dimming actuator will not be changed in case the corresponding scene has been selected Used EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of EnOcean Equipment Profiles EEP used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block uses following profiles Configuration EER 0738 02 Cora Commend Dimming Page 135 135 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Device specific hints Teach in Eltako Devices produced after Week52 09 support the central command FUD61NP Therefore they can be combined with the scenes function These FUD12NPN devices dont support the ramp function defined by the central command Therefore myHomeControl emulates ramps by continous sending new brightness values during the ramps Learn FUD12NPN GN A R12V DU new devices set upper wheel to position 5 old devices set upper wheel to position 6 set middle wheel to position LRN Devices produced before Week52 09 dont support the central command Therefore they can not be combined with the scene
181. in the on state Off ee Calor Transparent Select an icon indicating the off state of the light un Text shown in the off state Width of shadow 5 Activates flashing in the on state and defines the interval dl Flashing Interval sec 10 e Select if there shall be an indication if an on or off ind SH delay is in progress Se iia A dot in the lower left corner of the icon is indicating indicate On Delay that a delay is in progress coo ee off delay on delay Appearance Pictures There is the opportunity to define an individual image for each state on off This appearance supports the flashing mode as well Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element can also be located in the general control area In this case is only the appearance Indication available Page 85 85 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 2 Visualization Element Switch 2 This visualization element represents a double switch actuator This actuator is a combination of two single switch actuators When you drag in a switch 2 icon a switch 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the double switch actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channel can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Used Floors Rooms and Devices Ep ground floor S E upper floor Ga downlights 2 1 east 5 2 2 west To insert the se
182. ing helps to keep clarity within the project especially in large projects The structuring is based on floors and rooms There are following roles ad control functions SE cround floor A project consists of 1 n floors H Cd Office H rd staircase A floor consists of 0 n rooms Floors and rooms are just tools to structure the project These elements might be used in the sense of virtual floors and rooms Er Floor A floor contains several rooms The term floor has not to be seen strictly A floor could also represent a whole flat in an apartment house See Structuring to learn more about floors and rooms Networks Within the network area floors and rooms will be used as workspace areas Each floor and each room has its own workspace area where blocks might be placed Process Communication The floor room structure also supports the organization of the communication to the sensors and actuators Depending on the chosen process interface a transceiver unit of field bus node can be assigned to each floor Find details in chapter Process Interface Floors can be dragged in from the tree view New Floors Rooms and Devices Tab Functions ir Room The term room has not to be seen strictly Sometimes it is useful to create virtual rooms where general functions e g the presence simulation can be placed This function is not assigned to a single physical room See Structuring to learn more about floor
183. ing to acknowledge the reception of the radio message 3 Press the DN Button once more and the switch actuator leaves the teach mode Whenever one of the buttons of the real PTM radio button will be pressed the radio button block Door indicates this by changing the color of the corresponding pad to blue Simultaneously it forwards the command to the switch actuator block Kitchen The switch actuator block Kitchen reacts to the command and sends out a radio signal commanding the real switch actuator to switch on or off the light This simple example shall show the mode of operation of myHomeControl Beside the PTM radio switch and the switch actuator blocks there are lots of other useful blocks The logic blocks form the real power of myHomeControl Page 23 23 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Simulation Blocks inserted into a floor or room are immediately operational EK myHomeControl File ground floor living room DIS Rx Bix 090108 02951 Each block provides control and visualization elements The control elements can be operated with the mouse They command the blocks and trigger them to send commands to there Output pins or to send out radio messages in certain cases If a block receives a command on its Input pin it reacts corresponding to the command and sends in certain cases new commands to its own output pin s By operating the control elements and by obse
184. ins for input and or output signals Command output Signal output Multiple output Command input tE A Signal input Observer command input Connections Commands sends commands like ON and OFF sends an analogue value 64bit floating point values sends individual values to the connected blocks receives ON OFF commands and triggers the blocks evaluation algorithm In case of a logic block the block might create new commands In case of an actuator block the block might send out some radio messages receives signals and triggers the blocks evaluation algorithm This may case the generation of new commands receives ON OFF commands and triggers the evaluation loop But the block will not generate any radio messages it will only update its internal state Refer to Operational reliability for further details Page 124 124 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Connections The connections between the blocks forward commands or signals from the predecessor block to the successor block usually from the left to the right The connections connect the block using their pins e g cH Source pins are always located on the right side of the blocks Sink pins are always located on the left side of the blocks Data flows always from the source pin to the sink pin To create a connection first click the source pin then click the sink pin To delete a connection click the pins in the same order rs myHome
185. ion then an alternative port number has to be assigned Occupied ports are indicated by a red background of the input field Typical applications occupying the port Page 317 317 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH aWEB server e g IIS from Microsoft In case the web server is used then the port within myHomeControl has to be changed Skype The configuration of Skype might be changed to avoid occupancy of port 80 See menu Tools gt Options gt Advanced gt Connections uncheck Use port 80 and There is a tool available to evaluate the application occupying a port The tool can be found under the menu Start gt myHomeControl gt Tools gt TPC Port Occupancy Monitor Multiple Operating Stations This feature is under development Menu Settings Multiple operating stations This configuration item belongs to the functions Multiple Operating Stations V Multiple operating stations This is the server station For station profiles see tab Operating Station Profiles This is a client using profile IF address of the server Page 318 318 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Google PowerMeter Menu Settings Google PowerMeter myHomecControl is able to connect to Googles PowerMeter services If this feature is enabled then all devices blocks of type Electric Meter will be connected to Googles PowerMeter service The actual values of the devices are tramsmitted to Google periodicaly at
186. ion detects enough motion then the block sends out an ON command on the Motion pin otherwise it sends out an OFF command The motion detection function calculates a intensity value based on the size of the areas of the picture where motion has been detected This motion intensity value is shown within the properties dialog of the block The parameter Threshold Level which can be set in the properties dialog of the block defines the threshold level value for the motion intensity In case the motion intensity value is greater then the threshold level the block sends out an ON command on the pin Motion In case the motion intensity value falls below the threshold level then the block sends out an OFF command Properties The properties dialog enables the user to select a camera as well as to activate different features e g Operator Buttons Motion Detection In case changes within the configuration area of the camera will not be applied to the picture automatically then the apply button has to be pressed The picture above the button shows the actual pictures corresponding to the settings of the camera Types of cameras Page 253 253 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Various types of cameras are supported by e N Entrance this block ai Ste rance i i Camera The corresponding video source has to be selected d i JPEG stream DLink network camera JPEG stream Local capture device The p
187. ion state Clicking the button will start a communication check This means myHomeControl disconnects from the gateway and reestablishes the communication link Sort Lei Clicking this symbol opens the properties dialog of the individual field bus node This function is not yet implemented x Page 333 333 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Use the x button to remove the row of the corresponding field bus node Addressing of Signals The properties dialog of the blocks taken from the tab Modbus show a list of all slaves as well as an additional section listing all function channels of the block Select the appropriate slave from the list box showing all slaves which have been defined in the communication configuration areas ModbusTCP and ModbusRTU Function channels are a kind of signals which are read from or written to the Modbus slave device Each block contains an individual set of function channels Theses function channels have to be mapped to signal addresses of the corresponding slave device Application sample In 1 Name Switch 1 Hex Product Generisch gt Modbus Slave bad Slave 1 This section becomes visible in case the block has been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus Cmd Touch 4 f Cmd Turn Coil 1 4 f Switching State Input 1 la A D Off Delay min Modbus functions The modbus protocolls support various function codes to access different signal ra
188. it may take up to 20 Minutes until the valve actuator block indicates the correct positon at the correspoinding output pin after a change in the positon setpoint The connection line between the room temperature sensor block and the valve actuator block is used to force the emergency control mode of the valve actuator in case no radio telegrams are received from the room temperature sensor An OFF command at the input of the valve actuator block disables the valve actuator block to send response telegrams to the valve actuators request Summer operation mode To spare battery power during summer time the valve actuator is set into summer operation mode during the summer In this mode the valve actuator reduces its periodical request to 1 per hour The clock block is used to activate the summer operation mode Page 357 357 myHomecontoo MOONE oms Room Operating Panel from Sauter Actually the bidirectional mode is not yet supported by myHomeControl But the device can be configured to operate in the unidirectional mode which is supported by myHomeControl Configure the device for unidirectional operation mode In case the display shows Err 2 after a button has been pressed then the device is working in the bidirectional mode and has to be reconfigured to operate with myHomeControl The reconfiguration is done by a sequence of button presses Please refer to the manual of the device for guidance Set configuration param
189. ith the next button press the actuator switches off The upper toggle block reacts on OFF commands the lower one on ON command This has been configured in the properties dialogs of the blocks O Toggle on ON cmds Gei Toggle on OFF cmds m v active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action Page 343 343 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Addr OF Delay Imin On Delay Min In case a single button is used the switching actuator might be directly connected to the PTM radio button block If the button following mode has been activated then the actuator will switch on during the button is pressed 7 Forward ON Cmd _ Forward OFF Cmd Delay ec m El active last event strain Aion E In case a double button module will be used then the ON and OFF commands must be separated Use filter blocks to separate the commands The upper filter block forwards only OFF commands and the lower one only ON commands Page 344 344 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Central OFF Problem statement In case there are any dimmers in the installation and there brightness will be controlled by PTM buttons then the direct connection of a Central OFF PTM button to the dimmers my result in unexpected behavior If the configuration of the dimmers enable touch dim functionality Switch mode is disabled then the behavior of the dimmer depend on the duration of the key press If a key is pressed for more
190. ith up to 20 buttons Individual configurations can be done for each button as Button text latching mode and command sent to the network bat SH Name Keypad Product ES Nr of Button Pairs d Pins KE The top pin corresponds to the upper left button ve The second pin corresponds to the upper right button m Dh The third pin corresponds to the lower left button The forth pin corresponds to the lower right button Function This block feeds button operations into the network by sending commands The command to be sent is configurable individually for each button refer to chapter configuration below Blue colored buttons are either pressed or latched Configuration The properties dialog provides following configurations fields for each button Button text Set button visible Latch mode of the button pressing the button sends an ON command pressing the button sends an OFF command pressing the button sends an ON command releasing the button sends an OFF command pressing the button sends a TOGGLE command To implement operation mode selectors check the latching mode and select OnOff commands With this configuration the button sends an ON command in case the mode is activated and an OFF command if it is deactivate by the user Page 198 198 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization element Keypad Handlin
191. ization Element Counter 1 This visualization element represents a counter sensor Refer to chapter Counter 1 to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the presence indication sensor icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area a Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation 32 Liter 0 5614 Literis a Klee Le ireje 1 Page 55 55 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Bool Up GmbH gt Visualization Element Electric Meter This visualization element represents an electric meter sensor Refer to chapter Electric Meter to find details about the network functionalities Regard the option to establish a connection to Google PowerMeter Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the presence indication sensor icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area 1 51 kW Indication WNUN ar information 1110 50 kWh o Place the ee with us mane at any location of ne floor pian J Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot need ser and adapt it to the situation Indication with tariff information actual consumption income Meter reading tariff 0 Me
192. k received at least from one of its predecessor blocks an ON command as last command Or Condition not fulfilled The block received from all predecessor blocks an OFF command as last command If the Or block changes its state to Or Condition fulfilled then it sends an ON command to its successor blocks If it changes to the state Or Condition not fulfilled then it sends an OFF command to its successor blocks The Or block supports the Activation Feature D Page 209 209 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample As soon as one of the chairs will be occupied the light switches on The light switches off if all the chairs have become free again Properties The properties dialog shows the state of the commands received from the predecessor blocks State indication The toggle block knows the states ON and OFF If changes its state with each processed command On each state change it sends a corresponding command to the successor blocks The Or condition is fulfilled The block sent out an ON command The Or condition is not fulfilled The block sent out an OFF command Additional application samples Lights in office controlled by radio chairs Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 210 210 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH IC PID Controller This block implements a PID controller algorithm Min Limitation Factor Running Time min Max Limitation
193. k supports the activation feature Enables the activation feature v Activation Indicates the state of the activation lt p _ 8 v active last event OFF By clicking the activation state might be Activation Action changed This will also force the selected activation deactivation behavior e g sending Deactivation Action No Action last event The button last event shows the stored last command the block has send or would have sent if it would be activated at the time the event appeared A click on the button changes the type of command There are different behaviors selectable which will be triggered in case of the activation or the deactivation of the block Actvation Acton Send Last Event Deactivation Action Send OFF Cmd No Action Send ON Cmd Send OFF Cmd Send Last Event No Actions no command will be forwarded to the successor block s in case of activation deactivation Page 161 161 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Send ON Ornate an ON command will be sent to the successor blocks in case of activation deactivation Send OFF Cmok an OFF command will be sent to the successor blocks in case of activation deactivation Send Last Event in case of activation deactivation the block sends the stored last command to the successor blocks This is the command the block should send if it would have been activated at the time of the event Additional application samples
194. l be activated by the presence simulation function it will light up to only 30 to save energy Properties Before entering the set point values at least one successor block have to be connected to the output pin of the set point block The set point block supports the Activation Feature Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 228 228 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Settings This function stores a free amount of parameters and forwards the parameter values via the output pins to the network The corresponding visualization element enables the user to modify the parameter values There is a line for each parameter indicating the name and the actual value of the parameter Properties Max Windspeed ea iea ett The properties dialog shows a table Each row of the table corresponds to one parameter ES Use these buttons to append or insert new rows and to delete existing rows The buttons refer to the selected row To select a row click the corresponding time field ES Inserts a new row at the end of the table Deletes the selected row These buttons move the selected row Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Settings Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 229 229 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Shading The shading block commands jalousies to support the control of the room temperature lt
195. l and the Weather station via Serial Port RS485 Schematics USB RS485 Converter Weather e g Spectra Station USB 24V DC USB RS485 Wandlerstecker Spectra Produktnr 112887 www spectra de www spectra ch Dedicated Wetter page Checking the option Menu Weather will show an additional item Weather in the main menu This menu shows a dedicated page containing weather information provided by the connected weather station Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 286 286 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH GY Window Contact The Windows Contact block evaluates radio messages transmitted by an EnOcean STM250 Modul It forwards if the magnet covers the sensor or not af Name Windows Contact gt a The windows contact block provides to different output pins lt Command output ON OFF lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed Buttons The button simulates window positions This simplifies the testing of the network Take in account as soon as the block receives a radio message from the windows contact sensor it will change back to the real state State indications Window closed The magnet covers the sensor red magnet touches the windows contact sensor The block sends an ON command through its output pin Window open The magnet does not cover the sensor red magnet doesn t touch the windows contact sensor The block sends an OFF
196. lave individually Line State check The button indicates the connection state Clicking the button will start a communication check This means myHomeControl disconnects from the gateway and reestablishes the communication link he Lei Clicking this symbol opens the properties dialog of the individual field bus node This function is not yet implemented x Use the x button to remove the row of the corresponding field bus node ModbusRTU This communication requires the license option Modbus RTU WAGO BECKHOFF or any other Modbus field bus devices might be used as IO devices as long as they support the ModbusRTU protocol Settings Settings Settings Elli ModbusTCP Communication Elli ModbusRTU Communication Modbus RATU ae Zn ee RTU Fieldbus Nodes geo ER Line State Cycle CPU Name Address check ms load RTU Slave 1 1 Offline 100 o 3e ModbusRTU Node Select first the COM Port the baudrate and the dialect RTU ASCIl RTU Field bus nodes All nodes have to be defined in the area Field bus Nodes Use the ModbusRTU Node button to append a supplementary transceiver Name Each of the field bus nodes might be named This simplifies the assignment to the floors in a later step Address This communication type requires the input of the bus address of the slave to enable myHomeControl to address the slaves individually Line State check The button indicates the connect
197. low the installation process Page 381 381 myHomeControl Boo Up GmbH Fix IP Address for the Host A fix IP address should be assigned to the host PC This is required to announce it as a virtual host in your DSL modem router Network gt LAN Settings gt Internet protocol TCP IP Properties gt Remotedesktop Webverbindung Windows Internet Explorer ala Lol L Eigenschaften von LAN erbindung Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras Erweitert zur ck a Ss Suchen Key Ordner Verbindung herstellen ber BS Realtek ATL8139 810 Family PCI F al Neue Verbindung erstellen Ein Heim oder ein kleines Firmennetzwerk einrichten rE IF Einstellungen konnen automatisch zugewiesen werden wenn das ei Windows Firewalleinstellungen fr Netzwerk diese Funktion unterst tzt Wenden Sie sich andernfalls an ndern S i den Netzwerkadministrator um de geeigneten IP Einstellungen zu Wi Netzwerkoer St deaktivieren JL 1394 Verbind beziehen gt Verbindung reparieren i 0 IP Adresse automatisch beziehen mij Verbindung umbenennen gt Status der Verbindung anzeigen i IP Adresse 132 168 1 200 Einstellungen dieser Verbindung ndern Sybnetzmaske 255 255 255 0 Standardgatewap 132 168 1 1 Andere Orte DNS Serveradresse automatisch beziehen Br Systemsteuerung J Hetzwerkumgeburg G Eigene Dateien C Arbeitsplatz Alternativer DNS Server LAN Yerbindung PT
198. mand on the command input or an ON command on the observer input it starts the switch off delay function if the switch Off Delay is set to a value greater then 0 The switch off delay function automatically switches the actuator off after the switch Off Delay period If the Off Warning has been activated then the light gets turned off for 2 seconds 30 seconds before the OFF Delay expires This warns the user that the lights is going to be turned off shortly The user has the opportunity to press a I Button to restart the Off Delay In case the switch actuator block changes its state to OFF and the switch On Delay is set to a value grater then 0 then it starts the switch on delay function The switch on delay function prevents the actuator to switch on before the On Delay has been expired In case the actuator block receives an ON command before the on delay has been expired then it stores the command and switches on automatically after the delay Page 148 148 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH A double click on the ON button of a connected PTM radio button suppresses the switch off delay function This means if the switch actuator block receives a second ON command within 3 seconds it will deactivate the switch off delay function An example for this feature could be the light in the garage Typically it should switch off at least after 20 minutes But in case of doing some maintenance at the car the light should not switch off aut
199. mbH BO OS USS ee 123 SC 124 SEN te EE 125 Commands ei 126 Device type and location information u 127 Automatic Cascading EE 127 Te Ee Cascading WE 128 IS E ANIN O E 128 Send only LRN telegramS eege EE 129 EE 130 iD Rllsint EE 133 10 Dimmer LEE 136 1 Jalousie EE 138 CADEAU RW 142 DE Jalousie 3 145 A Jalousie 4 145 12 Jalousie 18 146 BEE 147 AES e aa 148 BD Switch 2 o ccccccccccsssesssessesssesssusssucssscssucssscssscsssssusssucssucssscsascausssesssussasssusssecssscsascsasssasssesssecsssesaneneene 154 4 Switch A coc ccccccecccsccsvecsesssecssecosecsuecsvessvessecssecssecsuessuessucssesssesssessvessussssssecssesssessuesstsssesssesssesasessteseees 155 OD Switch 8 voccccecscccsosssesssesssecsssssssssesssusssucssecssscsusssusssusssucsssessscsusssussesssecsasessussussserssecssscsasessvenavsnersaees 155 EI Valve 1 ccccssecccssssccssssccossssecssssccssssessssssesessisesssssesssssscessssesessssessssesssssissssisessssiessssiusesssseseassesessseeessee 155 BG EEE EBENE PEN occas ocspslidciesnitsvontercteotacl 158 EI Valve 8 vcccccccccssescccsssecossssecsssscessssesesssesessssesesssesessssesssssecessssesssssssessiesessssesssssessssssesssseceasesesssecesssee 160 Kee UE 161 W Activation veces eececesesessecsceseevecceececscececsevevscessevavaceusevavacsesevavaceuevavaceusevaceusevavatanersevaceeetevatnnereevananen 161 44 Abs Humidity c cceecescccsesececesescececececececeecevevevececececsecevavacacaveususevevavavaecevevevavavveneesevevavvenenentevens
200. mbH Lights in office controlled by radio chairs Within this sample the or block plays a central role The light is on as long as at least one of the chairs is occupied or the light have been switched on manually The rocker push button switch at the door switches the light on or off The filter block auto OFF releases the manual command The light is on as long as the manual path or one of the chairs is ON The filter block manual combines the rocker push button switch and the filter block auto OFF support the correct operation of the or block The activation input of the or block has been used to control the light depending on the brightness A outdoor light sensor measures the actual brightness The trigger block Level checks whether the brightness level is above a threshold value or below In case it is above then the light will be switched of Dene ano v Forward ON Cmd Forward ON Cmd _ Forward OFF Cmd v Forward OFF Cmd invert _ invert strip key press duration information _ strip key press duration information Deiv ee m y active lastevent w 7 active lastevent hen Ace stration eon Duschen einen Oman cio An w Page 347 347 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH m v active Activation Action No Action Occupancy Sensor A light shall be switched on by a occupancy sensor in case it is dark Switching off shall be delayed after the occupancy sensor detects th
201. meControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH On Off with on single button DUX control unit unnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnen een nnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnenene nennen 366 POSON lG eea a T A 366 Universal controller Thermokon SRC ADO BCS ssnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 369 Iompar turo ne 369 DIRT EE 373 Remote access to the myHomeControl WEB Serve s ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 379 Assioma MIP AdaresS tO NOSt PC ae ai 379 Create an account at DYNDNS Or eat 379 Contiguration Of the modem rouler sera a a N 379 IK NEE 380 Alternative Variant using Remote Desktop uuursunnaannennnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 380 Enable WEB Services oni the host una LE 380 Fix IP Address for th HOST EE 382 Aere in ee Be RER 383 Settings of the DSL modem router nnnnaannnnnnneannneoeennnnosrnnnnnssnnrrrrsrrrrrsrnreressnrrrrrsrnrnrrnrnnerensnnrrernnne 383 Appendix F Upgrading to Version EE 384 Page 9 9 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH First Steps The following chapter leads through a simple example This shows up how to operate myHomeControl Principle of operation Switch Actuator Radio Button e g Omnio UPS230 0 1 e g EnOcean PTM250 Si ni N Sep D Pa S Radio Gateway Power supply USB 230V e g BootUp myHomeControl The radio signals sent by the radio button will be received by the radio gatewa
202. munication check This means myHomeControl disconnects from the gateway and reestablishes the communication link rt Ab Clicking this symbol opens the properties dialog of the individual gateways Each gateway requires an individual base address This base address is used for the addressing of the EnOcean actuators Enter individual base addresses using the lower input field and press set Consider that after changing the base address 10 times this function will be blocked by the gateway Page 330 330 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Name bidirectional ld Range Base new Base ld Ping tailed The gateway is not reachable over TCP IP Probably the IF address is wrong or invalid x Use the x button to remove the corresponding gateway Floor assignment of the STC Ethernet nodes Boot Up cmon Each gateway in the application requires its own individual Base Id The Base ld is part of the address sent within the radio telegrams Regard following rules the first figure has to be a F the second last figure must be O or 8 the last figure must be 0 Within this section the gateways will be assigned to the floors For details refer to the chapter Floor assignments Page 331 331 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Modbus Communication This communication requires a corresponding license Following Modbus protocols are supported Modus TC via Ethernet Modb
203. myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH EnOcean Serial Protocol V1 This protocol is useful to adapt one single EnOcean transceiver Most Transceiver based on the TCM120 Module might be operated using this option E Af J I Gah A i d r of A n A iq ft Er d d k hr dr F Zi F Transceiver modul Specific settings R5232 Communication port for the EnOcean trangeiwer COM Ve d Range Base u Rm new Base Select the COM port of the computer where the transceiver will be connected COM1 COMn The Id Range Base will be show just for information This value is read back from the transceiver The red field indicates that actually there is no communication established to the transceiver myHomeControl tries to read the Id Range Base periodically As soon as the reading succeeds the field changes its color to green You may press the check button to initiate the reading manually To set a new Id Range Base enter the required base address into the input field and press the set button If the new address is shown now in the Id Range Base field then was the setting successful Consider that after changing the base address 10 times this function will be blocked by the gateway Connection failures Gateways based on UBS usually requires a driver Following drivers will be deployed with the myHomeControl installation The folder containing the drivers can be accessed via start menu Programs myHomeControl Drivers BootU
204. myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH myHomeControl extends your EnOcean by a new dimension AN NN User Manual Version 1 2 9 Boot Up amor Sonnenbergstrasse 460 CH 5236 Remigen Switzerland phone 41 56 284 09 21 fax 41 56 284 09 22 mail info bootup ch 2005 2011 BootUp GmbH Switzerland Page 1 1 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Introduction This chapter gives a short overview about the functionalities of myHomeControl The chapter First Steps introduces how to work with myHomeControl This is done on the basis of an example What is myHomeControl myHomeControl integrates building automation visualization and control tasks into one system User operation indication visualization and system functions are integrated The application my be free defined and is not restricted No programming skills are needed the application is defined with graphical symbols Application samples Energy Saving myHomeControl saves energy by turning of lights in case they is no further need lowering rolling shutters during the night phase consequently and by lowering the heating temperature during absence of the inhabitants Presence Simulation myHomeControl closes the rolling shutters sun blinds when it gets dark is turning the light on and off in different rooms and when it gets morning the blinds are opened as usual With this function in use the house really will look lived in whe
205. n RS232 EnOcean Gateway STC Ethernet provided by Thermokon This type of gateway is connected to the PC via Ethernet It communicates to the sensors and actuators via EnOcean radio signals It uses a dedicated protocol for the communication between the PC and the gateway Settings EnOcean Communication Thermokon EasySens Ethernet IO Devices e g Wago Phoenix Beckhoff This kinds of IO devices provide Ethernet interfaces which will be used for the connection to the PC It is required that the IO devices support the ModbusTCP protocol Settings Modbus TCP Communication Page 320 320 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH EnOcean Communication Options Options EnOcean Communication R5232 Online Communication port for the EnOcean tranceiwer COM12 wi ld Range Base hex FFF17D00h new Base Id FFF17D00 Si Version Siw Ver 4 0 0 0 Within this tab page the EnOcean based communication has to be configured Select a protocols from list box on the left side Corresponding protocol specific settings will appear on the right side Details about the different protocols can be found in following chapters e EnQcean serial protocol V1 e RS485 RS485 gateway Omnio AG e Thermokon EasySens e BSC BAP in preparation Page 321 321 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH EnOcean ld Filter There is an Id filter feature available The Id filter holds a list of valid EnOcean Ids EnOcean address of sensor de
206. n 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sensors Sensors are EnOcean devices measuring any physical signals and transmitting them as radio messages The sensor blocks which represent a sensor device within myHomeControl have to be teached to a certain sensor device to be able to evaluate them specific radio messages Teaching Sensor blocks gt Inthe context of EnOcean addresses allways means a combination of ORG and EnOcean Id The address value is allways shown in hexadecimal representation The address follows the schema lt ORG XX gt lt EnOceanld XXXXXXXX gt ORG is optional ORG is required for those sensors sending different messages under the same EnOceanld e g some room controllers Using the Teach button ORG is allways stored with the EnOceanld All sensor block provide in there Properties dialog a teach button an they show the teached address ax To teach a sensor first press the Teach button it LU Name PTM 250 starts blinking in blue color Then press the LRN Product EnOcean PTM 250 gt button at the sensor device to force it to send a radio message in case of a PTM radio button just teacher press on of the buttons clears an already teached address Fu 3 Clicks If the sensor transmits PTM type of messages e g a Pushbutton Rocker Switch then the option 3 Clicks becomes available In case this option has been checked then the teach in procedure requires at least 3 PTM messages This option is useful in cas
207. n is done now The next chapter describes how to interconnect control functionalities with the visualization elements Precede to chapter The first network Page 14 14 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The first Network This chapter explains how to create control functions Control functions are created within the Network tab Change to the Network tab The Network tab is structured similarly to the visualization tab On the right side of the screen the tree views new floors rooms and devices and used floors rooms and devices can be found The amount of available devices is even larger then in the visualization tab This is because some devices especially logic blocks inapplicable within the visualization tab During the configuration of the visualization myHomeControl inserted in the background corresponding blocks into the network area The automatically created network looks as follows ge i myHomeControl ZBR New Floors Rooms and Devices File p Visualization ist Logging 3eOptions Ei Test 4 Kitchen D Foram Cl Scenes The first tree blocks from the left side represent the inserted actuators for lights and blends The forth block handles the scenes functionalities Page 15 15 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Within the following steps the network will be extended to useful functions Arrange the blocks as shown in the figure below T
208. n press o e user button following mode Page 256 256 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample of the visualization element Entrance The dialog of the visualization element pops up automatically in case the button of the door bell has been pressed Press the button Door Opener to release the entrance door Settings of Visualization element e Name tons Geschossneme Entrance On Button Appearance Appearance Picture vd Gr EEE oure Klang Ein Ereignis Position horizontal vertical Border horizontal CG vertical wi Heigh Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 257 257 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Counter 1 The counter block receives its values from a TST230 01 device provided by Omnio There is a special firmware available implementing the counter function The device processes 2 independent 28bit counters Each of the counters is represented by an own instance of the counter 1 block Remark It is only allowed to insert a complete device into a project Refer to counter 2 for details The counter 1 block provides at its first output pin the counter value There is the opportunity to scale the value by means of received value factor offset Additionally a unit can be configured On its second output pin it provides a consumption value by means of a value reflected on a time base consumption center value 2 counter value 4 me time
209. n view Alternatively a picture can be selected This function is not yet available The checkboxes below the glasses icon control wether the corresponding scene button is visible or not Hidden scenes are activated via the corresponding input pin of the network block Page 113 113 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 4 Visualization Element Shading This visualization element is directly coupled to the corresponding logic block of the network area It indicates the conditions controlling the shading A click on the Visualization Element opens the control dialog for the shading conditions This dialog provides input fields for the set points for brightness wind speed and temperature Refer to chapter shading to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Tiny little icons indicate the shading conditions in the appearance Conditions Shading is active Pick up the light at the light symbol to move it to any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot 2 and adapt it to the situation Shading is inactive The connected Jalousies will not be lowered The shown icons indicate the actual states of the shading conditions Shading will only be performed in case all conditions are fulfilled ok not ok F Indicates if sunlight covers the window Indicates if brightness is above the brightness set
210. n you are away Sun blinds myHomeControl manages the position of the sunblind according to the weather and the altitude of the sun The altitude of the sun is considered based on the daytime and date Scenes Light control myHomeControl can be used to switch or dim individual lights or groups of lights automatically based on the time of day or the use that the room is being put to or whether the house is in use or empty or some external event e g Intruder Alarm triggered myHomeControl operates as a scene setting light control system scenes may be stored and recalled by a fingertip The scenes include light control and sun blinds management Security Monitoring myHomeControl monitors the doors windows and lights Before leaving the house at a glance check which window is open and where is the light still switched on Cameras myHomeControl supports most of the commonly used cameras USB IP Life pictures may be embedded into the visualization Load Limitation myHomeControl monitors the power consumption level and controls the total load by turning off and on various electrical consumers in case there are constraints given by the power provider Daylight myHomeControl daylight switch knows the sunrise time and the sunset time The calculation is based on date time and the altitude of the sun Irrigation myHomeControl evaluates the timing to irrigate your plants or processes the irrigation process by it self Alarming
211. naar ncmepne ieoecnsenctt aces sarsiessdeosaugaeeeawhaemeeeasyseisapoeeassodens 309 JAOUSIE TOS eects ca ee ee ee ren 309 UNI Klee 310 AUGSTA meiste a ee nn ER EEE 310 Reshow hidden messages sn01nnnnnneennneoeenrneosrnreresrnrtrrrsrnrerrsrnrrrrosnnrrronrnrerrsnnnrrrosnnrerrnnnrrrennnnenen 310 RIG CK TOP Dee 311 SPRICH SF SOU ene ee ee 311 Enabled Media ee een 311 Settings of the visualization eaua0000000 nann0nonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 311 ENaNgE ABDIEATON EE 311 Bee Keele e E 311 Indicate Radio Transmission cccccccsssseccccceeseececccueseeeeecsuaueeeeeeseeueeeeesseaseceseeaaseceeessaaeeeesssaageeeeesaas 312 Presentation MOOG euere nennen ee ee a iaa iai ea aaa aaea iiaiai eenei 312 Elle e TEE 312 IZ Oly MNO OIG eegene Eeer Ee EE eben 312 Animate Elements A 312 Display time of Control Dialogs cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeasceeeeeeeessaeseceeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeesssaaageeeeeeees 313 Dimmer brightness control slider indication MOE ceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaneeeeeeeas 313 Page 7 7 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Eolo oi a o PETEN ates meee mice nie iene nemo a Ela Eu se an eam a a EB an en oa mee anny 313 Record state changes and events 313 Record weather data mes ee een 314 Path forthe mdviduallog Mes ae 314 CIV E ef DEE 314 GT UE 316 NEE 317 Enable Compact WEB nee ehe
212. nabled then stepping will be continued to the given step Enter the target step in the input field just right of the round robin option Automatic stepping is configurable as well Automatic stepping bases on times For each step a time might be parameterized to step up or down The corresponding times will be started when a step becomes active After expiration of the time the new step becomes active The block accepts step commands on its input pin even if a time is running State indication The red dot indicates the actual step Application sample Single button scene control Activation of different scenes with one 1 channel radio button The sequence block activates the next scene with each key press Application sample Ambiance Ambiance Continuous change of lights A key press on the ON Button of the PTM radio button activates step 1 of the sequence block This activates scene S1 accordingly The setup of sequence block will toggle between step 1 and step 2 every 15 minutes This activates a new scene every 15 minutes The on and off ramps of the dimmers are setup to reach the new brightness set point value after 5 minutes This results in a smooth change between the scenes A key press on the OFF Button of the PTM radio button forces the sequence block into step 0 The scene Off will be activated accordingly Configuration of the sequence block Page 226 226 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Nr
213. nd On each state change it sends a corresponding command to the successor blocks The And condition is fulfilled The block sent out an ON command The And condition is not fulfilled The block sent out an OFF command Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 171 171 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH AnalogMux The analog multiplexer provides switching functionality for analog values This block might be used as selector for analog values or set points EJ Name AnalogMux Nr of Channels Actual Channel 0 T m v active last event keiten cr Denon seen Function The analogue multiplexer forwards the signal values received on the selected channel to its output pin There are two different methods to select a channel 1 Each channel provides a selection pin If the block receives an ON command on the selection pins of one of the channels the corresponding channel becomes active selected 2 There is a dedicated channel selection input which can be directly used to select a certain channel by value O channel0 1 channel1 etc Properties The input field Nr of Channels defines the number of available channels channel selection ON OFF gt Activation input gt signal input of channel gt selection of channel gt signal input of channel1 gt Selection of channel1 gt lt Signal output channel selection 0 X gt Activation input gt si
214. nd for the lights will be sent This pin has a special behavior The command is only forwarded to one of the connected successor blocks Page 165 165 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH MRS SR Properties Acknowledgment If it is requested to have an acknowledgement indication if the presence simulation has been activated then connect a switch actuator to this output pin e g the light in the garage When the block gets activated it illuminates the connected light for 20 seconds if it gets deactivated it illuminates the connected light for about 5 seconds Exit lights This pin can be connected e g to the floor lights or the lights of the stairs If the absence function is activated during the evening or night hours then the block turns on all lights connected to this output pin for about 15 Minutes Command output for the temperature set point switching If the user has entered a date of return and there is a time gap between now and the day before the estimated return then the temperature set points will be changed This pins sends out an OFF Command in case the temperature set points shall be changed and an ON command in case they should be switched back to normal conditions It is thought to use this pin in combination with Temperature Controller blocks and AnalogMux blocks Heating hours before return Absent till Simulation Activate Simulation Mode Activation m active last event
215. nd may more The visualization elements also allow direct control of lights blends and so on Example below a light visualization element is showing the state of the light It allows the user to switch on or off the light FZ Ratio ControlDemo Bedienung Netzwerk Protokoll Einstellungen nn nun i d d H H H d H H H H d A H H 3 A d 8 3 H d H H s 8 H d d Q Anwesenheitssimulation general controls Pr sentationsansicht Neue Geschosse R ume und Ger te amp Sensoren amp Aktoren amp Logik h Szenen Anwesenheitssimulation amp berwachung 22 Verbraucher berwachung Er Geschoss Le Raum Benutzte Geschosse R ume und Ger te a Ep EG gt Anwesenheitssimulation Stehlampe Cl Szenen N Terasse J T r 22 Verbraucher berwachung 06 09 07 07 27 56 The visualization can be operated in two modes this view is used to configure the visualization The tree views new floors rooms and devices and used floors rooms and devices are shown on the right side of the screen In this view floor plans and visualization 1 The design view 2 The presentation view elements can be inserted this is the view for the inhabitants The tree views are hidden in this view Fingertips can control the visualization elements Page 40 40 myHomeControl
216. ndicates that the vertical guide line references the temperature element Ur el re Q The violet lines indicate that the element is aligned to other elements of the same type In this sample an other light element The fat line indicate the center alignment of the elements Page 46 46 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Selected element can be aligned using context menu functions Therefore select all element to be aligned including the one which shall be used as the reference Then click the right mouse button on the reference element and select the alignment operation you like I I I I I I I I i Settings Bring to Front Send to Back E KEEN Copy format Paste format from Al gned to Top Move selected to other Room Center Horizontal Delete selected Aligned to Bottom Help on Switch 1 Data Sheet Aligned to Left Center Vertical Remote Learn Aligned to Right Page 47 47 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The Presentation mode The inhabitants use this mode Within this mode a fingertip might control all visualization elements ER myHomeControl illuminated lights a Presence Simulation JEE Rx Tx 09 01 08 10 19 40 241 To return to the design mode press the restore button Page 48 48 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Automatic return to the main page One of the floor tabs might be configured as the main
217. nges in the slave Signal type direction Function code Page 334 334 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Lists List of Devices The list of devices Main menu Lists List of Devices lists all hardware devices with their product type information counting and supplementary information about the location in the building This list might be used as an order list List of all Devices Device type Count Room Name Addr Identification Location Comment oio aro 0G B ro _ Temperatur 23912 Omnio F101 4 Omnio LS101 1 Oa Bura Helligket 20632 Omnio RTF102 5 Omnio UPD230 01 11 Omnio UPJ230 01 10 Unassigned devices Room Name Product type Addr identifi Location Comment V Steverung Steverung Schock Sud wi 75 FG Yiohnen ji ht SL id hl 693584 EG Wohnen d Sud VV w 63 This information might be entered in the properties dialog of the network blocks The columns with block text are editable The lower table list all devices not yet equipped with type or location information This information might be completed directly in the table or in the properties dialog of the corresponding network block The button Ste moves completed rows into the upper table Refer to Device type and location information Copy to Excel 1 Select all cells with a click on the most left header cell the empty one Press Ctrl C to copy the selected cells Open Excel spread sheet Select the cell of the E
218. nitored area The block sends an ON command The second click simulates the object is leaving the monitored area State indications The monitored area is free There is no object present in the monitored area Page 269 269 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Somebody is in the monitored area There is an object somewhere in the monitored area This is a sensor block and has to be teached This block provides the individual logging Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Presence Indication Hints to teach in devices Products BE e Thermokon SR MDS ci e Flextron SENSOLUX e PEHA SENSOLUX There are two different types of this device available in the market The older generation sends radio telegrams according to an own profile Occupancy Brightness Thermokon SR MDS The newer generation sends radio telegrams according to the standard profile Occupancy Brightness Temperature Ceil mounted Procedure to teach the device 1 Drag the corresponding product from the product tree into the workspace of the network The oroperties dialog will look as shown Name SR MDS Product Thermokon SR MDS gt unteached Occupancy Brightness lux 0 512 lux Omnia Eagle J Themokon SR MDS 2 Press the button Teach of the dialog 3 Press the button LRN of the device myHomeControl recognizes the generation of the device and adap
219. niversal controller Thermokon SRC ADO BCS Used EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean standard defines a couple of EnOcean Equipment Profiles EEP for the radio telegrams This block uses following EEPs to control the valve actuator controller Profile EEP Dedicated proprietary profiles EEP 07 10 05 Set Point and Day Night Control Kieback amp Peter EEP 07 20 01 Heating Valve Supported Devices Appendix B gives an overview about the supported devices Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Valve 4 This block represents a 4 channel valve actuator lt serves as a container for 8 single channel valve actuator blocks I Each channel of the 4 valve actuator acts like a single channel valve actuator Page 158 158 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH SRC ADO lt Represents the whole device lt Represents the first channel lt Represents the second channel The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually Page 159 159 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Valve 8 This block represents a 8 channel valve actuator e g of type e g REGT24 01 lt serves as a container for 8 single channel valve actuator blocks I Each channel of the 8 valve actuator acts like a single channel valve actuator Valve S E lt Represents the whole device
220. ns that the selected products might be replaced by one of the indicated ones This is just a suggestion Check the data sheets for details This information will be required by the device list Refer to List of all Devices Access this dialog from the properties dialog of the sensor and actuator blocks by pressing the button EI Addr Button Layout Page 127 127 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Automatic Cascading Control commands to actuator blocks which send time critical radio commands to their physical actuators are cascaded automatically Some media e g EnOcean radio gateways have limited bandwith for transmition of radio telegrams Therefore only a limited amount of messages can be transferred in a certain time frame Problem In the configuration shown on the left side the shading block sends a command to lower the blinds to all jalousie actuator blocks at a certain point in time Each of the jalousie actuator blocks sends out various radio messages to its linked physical jalousie actuator to command it into the shading position A gateway transmits these radio messages The gateway transmits message by message which will take a while To position the blinds precisely accurate timings are required for the transmission of the radio messages The required accuracy can not be achived by the system in case radio messages are jamed in the gateways transmit queue The cascading feature delays the transfer of
221. ns transmit only the Commands ONv and ON To control a switching actuator the actuator has to be set into the button follower mode This sample switches the switching actuators on either the button on the DUX control unit is pressed or the selector has been turned to the position On Off with on single button DUX control unit The toggle block forwards alternatively ON or OFF commands to the connected block if it receives an ON command In this samples there is no need to configure the switching actuators The first button press or operation of the selector the corresponding switching actuator gets switched on With the next operation of the button or selector the switching actuator gets switched off 3 Position Selector To use all of the 3 individual positions of a 3 position selector filter blocks and the button follower mode of the switching actuator will be used The filter blocks split up the transmitted commands of the DUX control unit into ON and OFF commands The upper filter block forwards only ONv and ON command to the Page 366 366 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH corresponding switching actuator and the lower one forwards only OFFv and OFF to the corresponding switching actuator Due to the button follower mode the corresponding switching actuator will be switched on as long as the selector remains in the O or I position Page 367 367 myHomeControl Bool Up GmbH Page 368 368 myHomeControl Boot Up Gm
222. nutes 900 seconds This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Brightness Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 07 06 01 Profile Light Sensor Measurement range 300 to 30000 Ix and 600 to 60000 x e EEP 07 06 02 Profile Light Sensor Measurement range O to 512 Ix and O to 1024 Ix Page 250 250 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Modbus Function Channels optional 2 A Name Brightness a Product Generisch Helligkeit gt ModbusTCP Slave Slave Zi This section becomes visible in case the block has I M 7 Value kp Reg 0 been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus ModbusTCP Slave The List box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with Value This analogue signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block Camera This block operates any camera USB cameras IP cameras and WEB cameras are supported The corresponding visualization element shows the
223. o Problem statement Play an audio message in case a window is open when the absence function is going to be activated Solution First create a corresponding audio message file The message shall be Attention there are open windows To create the audio file run the windows audio recorder which can be found in the utilities folder 4 Sound Audiorecorder Datei Bearbeiten Effekte press record button say text File save as Saves the file as xx wav 6 Nave mx Neem CFan RD OFF Evet m w active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action The Window Monitoring block summarizes all states of the window contacts In case all windows are closed the Window Monitoring block sends an OFF command through its output pin As soon as a window is opened the monitoring block send an ON command to the filter block The filter block forwards only ON commands It forwards received ON commands only in case it is activated If the absence function is inactive then also the filter block will be deactivated The filter block will not forward a received command but store it internally Page 364 364 myHomeControl Bool Up GmbH When the absence function is activated then also the filter block will be activated and it will send the last received command to the sound block Page 365 365 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Control Units Single Button Single DUX Butto
224. o move blocks move the mouse over the block press the left mouse button and pull the block to the desired location Please remark that blocks cannot be grabbed on their control elements buttons the PTM radio button block has to be grabbed on the horizontal beam in the middle of the symbol Fe myHomeControl a El amp File Ep Visualization PS Me wwork L D Flogging Options Test amp Sensors amp Brightness EI Presence Indication I PTM Radio Button GR Room Temperature Sensor STMIM Temperature Weather Station E Wind Window Handle First aPTM radio button block should be inserted which shall be used to switch the light on and off and drive the blend Drag a PTM Radio Button into the room The PTM Radio Button Block can be found in the tree view New Floors Rooms and Devices e g in the register generic Click on the little cross left of sensors to expand the sensor list Configuration set the button layout to double and rename the PTM Radio Button Door Hover the mouse eme over the black rectangle to open the properties dialog E Name D Name es H automatically Addr not yet teached To close the properties dialog click on the red button showing the white cross Button Layou The PTM Radio button block represents a real PTM radio button within myHomeControl It evaluates the radio messages of the real PTM radio button and forwards corresponding commands
225. ock provides a pulse modulated output to control these kind of devices The block creates a pulse pattern corresponding to the value calculated by the temperature control algorithm Sunlight Rooms with large windows oriented to the south sunlight will considerably support the heating The temperature controller block is able to consider the support and reduce the heating power for energy saving reasons To benefit from this function a brightness sensor has to be connected to the temperature controller Weather forecast optional not yet implemented myHomeControl gathers weather forecast information form the internet In case there is a forecast for nice and warm weather the temperature controller block reduces the heating power during the heating up phase after the night time lowering Page 237 237 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample Temperature control for a guest room If no guests are in the guest room shall be temperate to 15 degrees Celsius SRP Temp 40 07 Setpoint Temp 15 07 The room operating panel SR04P measures the actual room temperature The wheel is used to shift the set point by 3 degrees The basic temperature set point value of the temperature controller block set point 1 is set to 20 deg Celsius Set point 2 is used for night time temperature lowering The clock timer block activates and deactivates set point 2 according a configured schedule The third set point value is u
226. ocks provided by this sub tree are generic This means they do not represent a certain product They can be adapted by configuration to any product The EnOcean Radio System defines several profiles These profiles define the data mapping within the EnOcean telegrams Most devices are compliant with a profile The generic blocks support profiles corresponding to there kind e g the Room TemperatureSensor block supports all profiles related to room temperature measurement Configure the block to correspond to the required profile Special Thais Tab combines products which perform there own medium or to not fit efficiently into the product trees e g weather stations or cameras Page 305 305 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Functions This tab provides logical and comfort functions as well as floors and rooms Page 306 306 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Used Floors Rooms and Devices This tree view gives the overview about all defined Floors and Rooms all inserted blocks and their connections Fa myHomeControl New Floors Rooms and Devices This tree view is used to insert exiting blocks into the workspace areas and to get an overview about the connections of the blocks see List of connections Drag existing elements out of this tree view and drop them somewhere in the workspace area See Handling blocks Double click an element to navigate to it e g a double click on a room element
227. of the block to simulate the physical buttons or the selector Page 260 260 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH This is a sensor block and has to be teached Additional application samples Control Units Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP the EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e similar to Profile Light Switch Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Visualization element There is no visualization element available yet Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 261 261 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH gt Electric Meter This block evaluates radio messages sent from a electric meter sensor module lt Counter cumulative tariff 0 lt Counter cumulative tariff 1 lt current power lt Sampling interval in seconds lt Tariff 0 1 ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed Configuration te th Name Windgenerator 28 Product Eltako FW 12 16 gt Addr O701007FE8 Teach X accept only LRN Message Tar ff Correction value Tar ff kwh 0 000 Simulation Consumption kv Tar ff 7 Enable logging l DO HH MM Duration of recording 1 00 00 per file The block is able to handle different tariffs in case the corresponding tariff selection input of the sensor dev
228. of the visualization element within the floo plan Border horizontal a N Size of the element or border Page 73 73 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up cmon The window is closed Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation The window is open The window is tilt Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Application sample Windows of the ground floor The window monitoring provides status overview about all the windows Page 74 74 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Actuator Visualization Elements These visualization elements show status of the corresponding actuator and allow its control i Visualization Element Dimmer This visualization element represents a dimmer actuator Refer to chapter Dimmer to find details about the network functionalities Properties dialog There are different appearances available for this visualization element oO _ indication only If indication only is checked then the light cannot be switched on or off anymore from the visualization screen List of the available appearances Appearance specific configuration items _ indicate Off Delay indicate On Delay Geschossname Position Position of th
229. og will appear automatically and the properties of the floor can be set A name for the floor can be entered in the field Floor name e g Ground Floor Hovering the mouse over the black rectangle to open the properties dialog by fits for all the different graphical objects By pressing the BE button a background picture can be loaded e g a ground floor plan Within the file open dialog navigate to the folder DemoPics and load 3D jpg The picture is shown in the left workspace area There is a floor available now and visualization elements can be inserted Proceed to chapter Visualization elements Page 12 12 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Elements This chapter explains the placement of visualization elements for lights blends and scenes in a floor plan The visualization elements indicate the actual state of the lights and blends and enable the user to control the lights and blends with a fingertip er myHomeControl File Visualization Network lists SLogging t Options Password New Floors Rooms and Devices Sensors a OH Dimmer 1 Jalousie 1 A Jalousie 4 Switch 1 ch 2 ch 4 amp Switch 8 Logic _ indication only light Indication Picture Appearance Lamp Rx 27 02 08 16 11 34 A switch actuator representing the lights in the kitchen can be dragged over the floor plan Drop it at
230. ol Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Record weather data Menu Settings Logging This configuration item belongs to the functions Weather station This configuration item will become active as soon as a weather station has been inserted into the project e g a weather station network block _ Record weather data Max file size of recording MB Activates the recording of weather data These recordings will be stored into the Weather mdb database This requires a certain space on the hard disk of the system The maximum file size will be limited according to the setting Path for the individual log files Various sensor objects provide a individual logging feature to log the received signal values into individual log files Define the path where all the log files are to be stored Old log files will be discarded after the given period of time City Coordinates Menu Settings City Coordinates This configuration item belongs to the functions Day Light Shading Absence To calculate the position of the sun the location of the building is required Longitude and latitude has to be set to correct values City Coordinates Rough Coordinates of Building Additonal coordinates can be found at www heavens above com waw arthtools org lt is sufficient to use the coordinates of the next main city The values don t require high accuracy accuracy around 0 1 Degree will be sufficient Usually it doesn t matter if ligh
231. omatically at all Suppress the switch off delay function with a double click at the corresponding PTM radio button Double click the ON button gt The switch off delay function will be started even if the block receives an ON command over its Observer Input The duration off the switch off delay has to be set in the Properties dialog Invert deprecated The Invert checkbox activates the invert feature If the invert feature has been activated the block sends in case it receives an ON command an OFF radio message to the physical actuator And vice versa if it receives an OFF command it sends an ON radio message to the actuator The idea of this feature is to compensate wrong wireing gt The feature Invert is not available any more in new projects V1 2 9 and later In older project the option only appears for those actuator blocks where the option has been set before The button follower function is mostly used in combination with a PTM radio button In case the button following mode has been activated then the block will send an ON command to the actuator at the time the button gets pressed and an OFF command at the time the button gets released This is independent if the ON or the OFF button is pressed This function might be used also in combination with the invert feature The Observer Input supports this function as well Blocking enable enables the blocking functionality of the switch actuator This function is mainly use
232. ome walking during the set in operation phase sometimes it might be useful to insert radio button blocks not teached to real radio buttons These could be used as virtual buttons enabling part of the functionality e g the presence simulation These buttons can be operated from the Visualization tab Page 25 25 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Operational reliability Usually sensors on which actuators have to react on are teached directly to the actuators Example Staircase radio button gt K first floor N Za an went first floor radio buttons al ground floor A x A oe light x ee ground floor radio button ae basement A s light s basement The figure above shows the conventional way of a staircase installation The different radio buttons have to be teached multiple times in to different switch actuators Each switch actuator has to be teached with all radio buttons it should react on The benefit of this solution is the complete independency on other components e g PC with myHomeControl running on it This solution is running as long as the actuators are feed with power Disadvantageous is the complex teach in process Depending on the location of the actuator it is time consuming to set them into teach mode Whenever a connection should be modified power outlets have to be disassembled or cabinets have to be cleared to set the actuators into the teach mode Pag
233. on 60 Visualization Element PTM Radio Button 8 62 Visualization Element Radio Char 63 Visualization Element Heceivelanalog nennen nnnnnnn nennen enennnn nennen 64 Visualization Element Room Temperature Sensor uses nennen 66 i Visualization Element Temperature nennen nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnnnnne nennen 70 CR Visualization Element Window Contact 72 Visualization Element Window Handie 73 Actuator Visualization Elements 222022000200000000n0nnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunn nun m nun m nun m nun m nun nun ENEE REENEN 75 d Visualization Element DIMM EEN 75 10 Visualization Element Run Cp anna een aan 17 1 Visualization Element Jalousie 78 2 Visualization Element Jalousie 3 80 A Visualization Element Jalousie A 80 22 Visualization Element Jalousie 173 80 1 Visualization Element Switch 82 3 Visualization Element Switch 3 86 4 Visualization Element Switch A 86 Visualization Element Switch 8 86 Function Visualization Elements 22 220002000n000n00nnn0nnnnnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnun nun nnun nun nun nun nnunn nun nun 88 Visualization Element Abeence kokenn inknn nk nkaka nenn akanan nanenane ranere nan 88 9 Visualization Element Clock 90 SS Visualization Element Consumer Monitoring BEE 92 Ej Visualization Element Design Mode 93 amp Visualization Element Rei VE 94 Vigualization Element Door Controller ccccsccsesssssesssessessessscsssssessessessessessesstestesseseestestessessess
234. on limits the amount of simultaneous browser sessions to 20 License option ClientServer Enables the support for multiple operating stations Page 338 338 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Troubleshooting myHomeControl breaks during startup showing an error message The project database seems to be corrupt To restart myHomeControl successfully the project files have to be deleted in advance myHomeControl creates backups of the project periodically so deleting project files doesn t necessarily mean lost of the project After restarting myHomeControl there is the opportunity to load a backup of the reccent project 1 press Windows start button gt All Programs gt myHomeControl gt Tools gt Clean Project 2 start myHomeControl 3 File gt Project gt load gt select a backup of the project Multiple Application Start Either myHomeControl has been already started is actually running or didn t terminate correctly In case no myHomeControl related window can be seen then use the task manager to terminate a running instance of myHomeControl Right click the windows start line gt Start Task Manager gt click tab Processes gt select HomeControl exe gt press button End Process Now myHomeControl should be able to be restarted Restart of myHomeControl fails Refer to myHomeControl breaks during startup showing an error message Uninstall of myHomeControl
235. on mode only takes place if the block has been activated by means of the inhabitants have checked out If simulation mode is activated during daylight hours then the block will lower the blinds and start the light simulation If simulation mode is deactivated during daylight hours then the block will lift the blinds and turn of all lights used for the light simulation Buttons Click the gt gt button to force a change of lights This might simplify Testing of the network State indication The presence simulation is deactivated and will not generate any commands The presence simulation is activated but the simulation doesn t generate any commands because the actual time is not during the night hours The presence simulation is active and generates commands for the connected jalousies and lights Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Presence Simulation Additional application samples Interrupt heating in case a window has been opened Create and play an text message audio Page 167 167 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 168 168 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Addition This function summarizes the values of all connected signals Formula Output sum of the signal values of all signals connected to the input pin Properties Wane ston ay m v active last event Activation Action
236. ontroller and feeds it into the network This feature is only available in case a license option Modbus TCP or license option Modbus RTU has been bought This feature is only available in case a license option PEHA PHC has been bought Product ECH a Modbus Slave Slave 1 Value Inp Reg 1 dE i type This block provides one output pin lt actual value as number A signal type is to be selected in the settings dialog of the block The signal type controls the icon the data representation and the unit shown in the visualization element This block provides the individual logging Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP e none Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Receive analog Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 276 276 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Modbus Function Channels optional 7 a Name Window Contact 28 Product Generisch Fensterkontakt gt ModbusTCP Slave Slave i This section becomes visible in case the block has cle input 0 el been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus ModbusTCP Slave The List box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with State This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block Page 277 277 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Zo Room Temperature Sensor The Room Tem
237. ontroller device becomes a new meaning The position of the wheel gives an offset to the temperature setpoint calculated from the reference curve This block provides the individual logging Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Room Temperature Sensor This is a sensor block and has to be teached Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 07 10 01 Temperature Sensor Set Point Fan Speed and Occupancy Control e EEP 07 10 02 Temperature Sensor Set Point Fan Speed and Day Night Control e EEP 07 10 03 Temperature Sensor Set Point Control e EEP 07 10 04 Temperature Sensor Set Point and Fan Speed Control e EEP 07 10 05 Temperature Sensor Set Point and Occupancy Control e EEP 07 10 06 Temperature Sensor Set Point and Day Night Control e EEP 07 10 07 Temperature Sensor Fan Speed Control e EEP 07 10 08 Temperature Sensor Fan Speed and Occupancy Control e EEP 07 10 09 Temperature Sensor Fan Speed and Day Night Control Page 280 280 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH e EEP 07 10 10 Temperature and Humidity Sensor Set Point and Occupancy Control e EEP 07 10 11 Temperature and Humidity Sensor Set Point and Day Night Control e EEP 07 10 12 Temperature and Humidity Sens
238. oor FFFFFFEOH X Transceiver Assignment Hoor Transceiver Ground floor Gateway of Ground floor k Upper floor Gateway of Upperfloor dik In the situation shown above the RS485 protocol has been selected for the radio communication The red field indicate that at least one of the gateways is offline This is a general status information about the communication status to the gateways The field becomes green as soon as all gateways change there state to online Page 324 324 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH RS485 Select the COM port of the computer where the transceiver will be connected COM1 COMn The Baudrate has to be selected accordingly the jumper settings of the gateway Transceiver Module Within the area Transceiver Module all transceivers have to be defined Use the Transceiver button to append an additional transceiver An alternative method to append an additional transceiver is to connect it to the RS485 network and then press the LRN button This forces the transceiver to announce that it is entering the learn mode This announcement contains information about the base address of the transceiver myHomeControl detects the presence of a new transceiver and appends a corresponding row to the list of transceivers Name Each of the transceiver might be named This simplifies the assignment to the floors in a later step Id Range Base This communication type requires the input of the individual Id Range Base ad
239. opens the corresponding network view in the left side working area The right mouse button opens the corresponding context menu List of connections ke nice lt q Blocks connected to an output pin K consumer monitoring oround floor lights Ee sources Blocks connected to an input pin There might be connections to block in other rooms Depending on the actually shown room not all connection to or from a block might be visible in the actual workspace area Therefore the presentation of the connections in the tree view might be helpful Page 307 307 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Process Interface myHomeControl supports several transceiver types and field bus nodes with their dedicated protocols Refer to Options Communication Page 308 308 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Bool Up GmbH Settings Within the Settings tab the general settings might be adjusted General This group provides general configurations Project name Project name The project name will be shown in the header line of the main window Fa myHomeControl Richiger at Home File Er Visualization Network 4Lists Logging lt will also be used as file name when a backup of the project is created Language Language Select the language according your requirements All shown texts will be translated immediately Please take in account that the manually given texts will not be translated There is also an opport
240. or Set Point Control e EEP 07 10 13 Temperature and Humidity Sensor Occupancy Control e EEP 07 10 14 Temperature and Humidity Sensor Day Night Control Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Additional application samples Interrupt heating in case a window has been opened Room Operating Panel from Sauter Device specific hints Sauter This device is shown in myHomeControl as two blocks EY RU110 146 one Room Temperature Sensor and one PTM Radio Button Both blocks have to be inserted individually into the project Each of them has to be teached individually Refer to Device specific hints for the PTM Radio Button Refer to Application Sample in Appendix C Eltako The device sends and shows the temperature setpoint FTR55D value as an absolut value Therfore it is not possible to use the Temperature Reference Curve feature If the Temperature Reference Curve would be used then the temperature setpoint indication on the device would be invalid Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks STM100 This block receives and evaluates BS1 and BS4 telegrams It may represent sensor devices based on the STM100 or STM110 modules This block is just for experimentation purposes This is a sensor block and has to be teached Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 281 281 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Ti POLE pp GmbH Z Temperature The Temperature Sensor block evaluates the radio m
241. or periodically If this is not the case then the sensor might be broken The result of the monitoring is provided by the block of the sensor to the network by an output pin Example Window Contact lt Command output ON OFF ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed The block forwards following commands Stays ON as long as radio messages from the sensor will be received continuously If messages are outstanding for more then the monitoring period an OFF command will be sent indicating a communication loss The corresponding visualization element of the sensor shows an indication in case of a life sign failure A red antenna symbol pops up in the area of the visualization element Individual logging Various sensor blocks provide a logging feature which logs received signal values to individual log files per sensor The CSV format is used for the log files The log files can be directly opened in Excel d Enable logging ee DD HH MM uration of recording ae per file 0 00 05 If the logging has been enabled then log files will be created on reception of radio signals The Duration of recording per file defines the period of time where signals where logged to the same file After the period a new file is created Regard that Excel limits the amount of rows per table to about 64000 lines Therefore the period has to be adapted to the send rate of the sensor to keep logging within the row limits The files will be named as follo
242. or plan drag in the corresponding icon 8 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter PTM Radio Button 8 to find details about the network functionalities Page 62 62 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Radio Chair This visualization element represents a chair indication its occupancy state by a radio signal The visualization element indicates if a chair is occupied or free Refer to chapter Radio Chair to find details about the corresponding network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the RoomTemperatureControl from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices Touch the symbol with a fingertip to open the additional information dialog This dialog shows minimal and maximal temperature values and the trending of the temperature There are different appearances available for this visualization element Ground Floor Rad o Chair _ enable simulation If simulation is enabled the visualization element changes the state on each click Appearance List of the available appearances Appearance Symbol Appearance specific configuration items Position eer an of the visualization element within the floor Border horizontal E vertical Size of the element or border Width 94 Er Height al Icon The chair is free Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the
243. otizen Texte Allgemein Autostart Emptang Notizen Texte d A Nach Empfang einer Nachni een oe Wahlen Sie hier aus ob Message Bob automatisch beim Windows Start mitgestartet Angezeigte neue Nachrichten M automatisch als gelesen markieren nach 3 Kal Sekunden lf Nach Autostart minimieren Nach manuellem Start minimieren Inhaltsfilter Message Bob soll eingehende Nachrichten blockieren wenn bestimmte Begriffe darin enthalten sind Spamfilter aktivieren OK Abbrechen Obemehmen Abbrechen Ubemehmen Einstellungen PS Einstellungen Allgemein Autostart Emptang Notizen Texte Allgemein Autostart Emptang Notizen Texte NT Einstellungen Hotkeys Server Browsing Import Export NT Einstellungen Hotkeys Server Browsing Import Export Netzwerk aktiv durchsuchen Jh Message Bob soll das Netzwerk aktiv nach anderen Teilnehmem durchsuchen Sie besitzen nicht die ben tigten Benutzerrechte um Einstellungen vomehmen zu k nnen Nur Administratoren konnen Dienste anhalten und deren Konfiguration andem Teilnehmer finden Message Bob kann Computer die sich online Nachrichtendienst autostart toggle gemeldet haben automatisch zur Workstationliste Hachrichtendienst aus ke See NetBlOS Listener lauft Page 363 363 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH Create and play an text message audi
244. ow standard EnOcean functionality can be combined with convenience factions of myHomeControl Observer input Refer to chapter Operational reliability to get an overview All actuator blocks provide an observer input pin This pin has to be connected whenever a sensor Is directly teached to an actuator The regular input pins can be used in parallel e g for convenience functions In the example on the left side the real PTM radio button has been teached directly to the real switch actuator The switch actuator block will not generate radio messages for those commands it receives from the PTM radio button block For the commands received from the clock it will send out corresponding radio messages to the real switch actuator Page 28 28 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Example Blend A Venetian blend should be lowered for shading purposes Therefore it should be lowered only to the half of the movement range This is one of myHomeControl convenience functions e es 7 an lt lt qe A yn A e mvHomeControl x The PTM radio button has been directly teached to the blend actuator Within myHomeControl a representing block has to be inserted for each radio button and blend actuator Connect the radio button block with the observer input H of the des blend actuator block After pressing a radio button the Jalousie actuator starts lowering the blend The radio button block
245. p USB2 EnO868 USB2 EnO315 see subfolder BootUp BSC BoR see subfolder BSC_BoR Page 323 323 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Omnio 485 Bus This setting fits for the bi directional RS485 Gateway from Omnio AG A dedicated protocol will be processed This protocol includes the standard TCM120 messages as well as some additional acknowledgement messages The RS485 Gateway has some special behavior which is different to a gateway forwarding directly the standard TCM120 messages The RS485 standard allows connecting several transceivers to the same COM port of a computer This gives the opportunity to locate on each floor an own transceiver ie a z NW VE D Lti k a d Ti AH H Baak LY SVE transceiver RS232 lt gt RS485 interface upper floor NN ground floor Sy transceiver The topology shown above should solve all radio transmission range problems A certain transceiver may also cover more then just one floor This depends on the characteristics of the building It is not a must that the number of transceivers corresponds to the number of floors Supplementary to the transceivers a RS232 lt gt RS485 or an USB lt gt RS485 interface will be required Specific settings Settings Settings EGG EnOcean Communication R5485 Da 7 ei fine Communication port for the EnOcean tranceiver COM10 wi Baudrate 57600 wi Transceiver Module Nam Id Range Line State deeg Base check Gateway of Upper fl
246. page If the user doesn t interact with the system for a configurable period of time then myHomeControl returns to the main page automatically The return to the mainpage is only processed by the system if it is in presentation mode After the return to the main page only a configurable set of floor tabs is shown and can be selected by the user Sample Edit Er Visualization WW around floor The floor tab Ground floor has been configured to be the main page home There is a link object located on this tab It points to a hidden tab Service As soon as the link object gets clicked by the user myHomeControl shows and selects the tab service as shown below Edit Er Visualization Senge 1 itor aeons Automatic Shading Automatic Cooling Temp Setpoint The link object is configured to show all tabs If the user stops interaction with the system the return to main page delay starts If the delay expires then myHomeControl automatically selects the tab configured as main page and hides all tabs which are not configured to be shown at this stage The configuration of the return to main page feature is to be done in the general settings menu Page 49 49 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization elements There are several visualization elements available to be placed either in the floor workspace area or in the general controls workspace area The
247. perature Sensor block evaluates the radio messages transmitted from a Room Temperature Sensor Room control unit Various profiles are supported by this block including humidity fan speed and occupancy buttons Provide Setpoint for Temperature Provide Setpoint for Humidity execute Reference Curve Range for the Temp SP Offset rel Humidity TZ Ur Setpoint Humidity 7 Depending on the selected type of sensor different output pins becomes visible The block forwards the different measurement values to its dedicated output pins Sample lt Actual temperature as Celsius value lt Set point temperature as Celsius value lt Operation mode lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed Operation mode Meaning of the value 0 Automatic 1 Day Page 278 278 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 2 Night 3 Antifreeze The Properties dialog provides testing features as an input field for the Actual Temperature and an input field for the Set point temperature to simulate temperatures Take in account that your input will be overwritten by the next reception of a radio message transmitted by the sensor device Provide Setpoint for Temperature Provide Setpoint for Humidity In case the Room Temperature Sensor doesn t provide a control for the temperature set point then the block may provide a control for the temperature set point by itself The value for the temperature or humidity set point
248. pictures taken by the camera This network block enables the integration of the camera into the control logic The block provides different features as described below Page 251 251 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 7 Enable recording Operator Buttons Path to store recording v Enable On Button _ E Enable Off Button Time period for recording secs 7 Enable Motion Detection F Record on motion Act Motion Level Treshold Level h active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Action No Action Function Opens ControlDlg of Visualization gt Starts stops recording gt Activation input gt lt Command Output Buttons lt Command Output Motion detection Open Control Dialog of the Visualization Element An ON command which is received by the block over the command input pin open dlg forces the visualization element of the camera to open the dialog showing the pictures of the camera The corresponding floor tab will be selected accordingly This feature might be used to automatically show the camera in case the door bell has been pressed Refer to the visualization element of the camera Recording of the video stream If Enable recording is checked in the properties dialog of the camera block then the block becomes an additional input pin REC An ON command on this pin starts the recording of the video stream An OFF command stops recoding The loca
249. point Indicates strong winds D Indicates if temperatures are within the set point ranges Control Dialog Shading is connected to various conditions Shading takes place only if all conditions are fullfilled A green check indicates a fullfilled condition a red cross indicates that the condition is not fullfilled Within the control dialog of the shading function the various threshold values for the conditions might be modified Page 114 114 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 4 BT F EL e d 2 Se OO d i eee F CH il 8 dh gl F d st WS Fr f T eg Den Sei Wf ON d Wd Ei et ia ech ae FF Gi r Sr dee FERNE amp d BS Em d BILFEIER ie d 3 i D r ef ZA 8 j j x i 15 0 ms SAY 23 0 Click on a set point input field to open the calculator and to edit the set point value 1 JL2jL3jJLxJ baj kaj kej ke Lz JLs JL Laer Sal ec KR Brightness Rain The actual brightness value is below the configured threshold value Therefore this condition is not fullfilled In case of passing clouds the brightness might change regularly To avoid multiple jalousie movements the shading functions changes to an altenative evaluation mode of the brightness value The alternative evaluation calcualtes the average of the brightnessvalue and uses this value to evaluate the brightness condition This mode is shown be following indication 12000 lux
250. pplication Message Bob and passes the argument string to it The means broadcast to all computers on the net Settings for Message Bob on the computer running myHomeControl Einstellungen Einstellungen CS NT Einstellungen Hotkeys Server Browsing Import Export NT Einstellungen Hotkeys Server Browsing Import Export Allgemein Autostart Empfang Notizen Texte Allgemein Autostart Emptang Notizen Texte Wahlen Sie hier aus ob Message Bob automatisch beim Windows Start mitgestartet werden soll Inhaltsfilter Message Bob soll eingehende Nachrichten blockieren wenn bestimmte Begriffe darin enthalten sind Spamfilter aktivieren OK Abbrechen Obemehmen OK Abbrechen bemehmen Page 361 361 myHomeControl um Einsehngen vornehmen k nnen Nur j Iw Message Bob soll das Netzwerk aktiv nach Administratoren k nnen Dienste anhalten und anderen Teilnehmem durchsuchen Teilnehmer finden Message Bob kann Computer die sich online Hachnchtendenst autostart toggle ray haben automatisch zur Workstationliste HM achrichtendienst aus NetBlOS Listener lauft Page 362 362 myHomeControl Wa OTE Settings for Message Bob ob the computers ree ing the message Einstellungen Ea Einstellungen m NT Einstellungen Hotkeys Server Browsing Import Export NT Einstellungen Hotkeys Server Browsing Import Exp Allgemein Autostart Empfang N
251. pportunity to install the update Splash Screen Select a picture file which is used as splash screen during startup of the application Enabled Media This group box provides checkboxes to enable media which will be shown in the tree view of the new devices Corresponding communication protocols are only enabled for the selected medias Settings of the visualization This group provides configuration of the visualization screen Change Application Suppress change to other applications If this option has been activated changes to other applications will be suppressed during the presentation screen is active Also termination of the application will be suppressed This option should be activated in case myHomeControl shall run as the only application on the computer Following windows mechanisms will be deactivated Start menu Task bar Windows Button At Tab Alt F4 Minimizing and closing of the window When returning to the design mode all mechanisms will be reactivated The combination of the keys Crtl Alt Del is not locked to enable the user to start the task manager in very special cases Display General Controls Display area for general functions This option defines if the Tab Control for the general functions within the visualization screen shall be displayed Page 311 311 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Indicate Radio Transmission mp If this option has been activated then the s
252. r 2 8 downlights 0 8 1 Switch 1 9 8 2 Switch 1 gt 8 3 Switch 1 gt 8 4 Switch 1 0 8 5 Switch 1 0 8 6 Switch 1 8 7 Switch 1 8 8 Switch 1 To insert the second channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 8 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter switch 8 to find details about the network functionalities Page 87 87 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Function Visualization Elements These visualization elements inform about the state of certain logic functions and provide specific controls to operate them Visualization Element Absence This visualization element is directly coupled to the corresponding logic block of the network area It enables activation and deactivation of the absence function This function provides a presence simulation and a temperature lowermost for energy saving Refer to chapter Absence to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area This visualization element cannot be placed in the plan floor area Appearance in the general controls area Absence m Actually some body is at home The present button was pressed as last The engaged gray button indicates this The presence simulation function is now in the deactivated state absent Pressing the absent button following dialog will pop up and request a confirmation to start the absence function Shallth
253. r is activated or running e g lights This informs you clearly about the state of the electrical consumer in your building if you intend to leave Name ground floor lights Working Consumers wl active Activation Ace Donnan Ain on Function The consumer monitoring block collects the states of all attached Switch Actuators and Dimmer Actuators It monitors if one of the actuators is in ON state Indication by the consumer monitoring block 1 Atleast one consumer is in on state gt OI Lights areon i up 2 All consumers are switched off 2 as All off Alarm output The output pin indicates an alarm When the block leaves its internal all off state an ON command will be sent through the alarm output pin The Properties dialog lists the active consumers State indications Light s are on At least on consumer is energized All off All consumers are switched off Page 178 178 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample As soon as one light gets switched on the consumer monitoring block changes its internal state to Light s are on and sends a ON command through its alarm out put Day Light This block calculates the time of sunrise and the time of sunset Depending on the calculated times it send corresponding commands to the succeeding blocks The time of sunrise and sunset differs from day to day Therefore a clock is not the best solution to switch outdoor lig
254. ragraph Position of the visualization element within the floor plan Size of the element or border This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 95 95 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH List of events Ca next event Monday 19 00 On So Mo Di Mi Do MM aM 0 20 Within this dialog events can be configured removed or new events might be appended to the list These buttons move the selected event upwards or downwards E E These buttons add a new event beyond the selected event or remove the Pe a selected event A click on the time cell opens the time editor Page 96 96 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Door Controller This visualization element is directly coupled to the corresponding logic block of the network area It visualizes the actual state of an automatic door e g a garage door It also enables the user to control the door Refer to chapter Door Controller to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the door controller icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area Properties dialog There are different appearances available for this visualization element Switel Door front view
255. ration of the trend see pictures below For details refer to next paragraph Appearance specific configuration items Duration of Trend Position u S f Position of the visualization element within the floor hor zontal 166 vertical plan Border horizontal Dr vertical EE Size of the element or border it S Hei Trend If Save Data has been activated then the trend will be presented with the same data also after a startup of myHomeControl But this requires some disk space in the project database So in case disk space is very limited this option should not be activated The export button stores the logged trend values to a comma separated file Page 52 52 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot H and adapt it to the situation Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Additional information dialog The actual brightness value will d 5 3 O 9 ME be recorded and presented in l A Ux form of a trending diagram 15379 0 110001 0 H g Page 53 53 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH e Visualization Element Camera This visualization element displays the pictures of a web cam Refer to chapter Camera to find details about the network functionalities Appearanc
256. resented input fields correspond to the DS selected type of camera PiXORD network camera Password KG StarDot Express 6 video server StarDot Nett om network camera ncontrolled IP Cameras There are some concrete types of cameras available showing dedicated input fields In case a camera of an unknown type shall be operated then select the JPEG stream and enter the camera specific connection string into the URL field Usually the connection string also includes some configuration items Refer to the documentation of the camera for details Application sample http webcam oii ox ac uk Video Source Axis 205 network camera Sener http webcam oil ox ac uk Login Password Size 320240 ei Stream type Page 254 254 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH USB Cameras If the local capture device has been selected then a list box showing all USB cameras available on the PC will be shown Camera Video Source Local capture device wi Device Camtasia Studio Video Capture Driver Camtasia Studio Video Ca Cirus Logic USB DVR2 Source SANYO Digital Camera PC Camera select the corresponding camera WEB Cams The WEB cams differentiate between JPEG and MJPEG The connection string to the camera indicate the type to be selected Select the type corresponding to the extension pg or mjpg Application sample JPEG http Awww swisswebcams ch mobotix ar3o jpg MJPEG http www broodjesexpress net 8080 axis
257. rol Boot Up GmbH Internet Informationsdienste IIs Klicken Ste auf de Kontrollk stchen der Komponenten die hinzugef gt bzw entfernt werden sollen Grau gef llte K stchen kennzeichnen Komponenten die nur zum Teil Installiert werden Klicken Sie auf Details um die Unterkomponenten anzuzeigen Unterkomponenten von Internet Informationsdienste IS D gt FrontPage Z000 Serverermeiterungen D a FTP Dienst File Transfer Protocol lt gt Gemeinsame Dateien ipg SMTP Dienst u Snap In Intemet Informationsdienste Beschreibung Werwendet das HTTF Frotokoall um auf Webchentantragen in einem TCPIP Netewerk zu antworten Erforderlicher Speicherplatz 56 2 MB Details Vertigharer Speicherplatz beer MB Abbrechen click Details Way Dienst Klicken Sie auf de Kontrollk stchen der Komponenten die hinzugef gt bzw entfernt werden sollen Grau gef llte K stchen kennzeichnen Komponenten die nur zum Teil installiert werden Klicken Sie auf Details um de Unterkomponenten anzuzeigen Unterkomponenten von WWW Dienst P Remote Desktop webrverbindung Lg virtuelles Verzeichnis f r Drucker C Dg Virtuelles Verzeichnis f r Skripte af Wha Dienst 0 4 MB Beschreibung Steuerungs und Beispielsgeiten f r Achen um Chentyverbindungen fur Terminaldienste im Web zur verf gung zu stellen Erforderlicher Speicherplatz FB ME Yerfugbarer Speicherplatz bee id ME select Remote Desktop OK OK OK 2 Fol
258. rol Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Start myHomeControl now and configure the communication provided by the options tab Thermokon specific settings Settings Settings Mi EnOcean Communication Themokon EasySens Omie STL Ethemet node Themokon Easy Sens Line State Name Type IP address Port SE Gateway of Ground floor STC 192 168 2140 4005 Xx STC Ethernet node Flaorrelations to the STR Ethemet nodes Hoor Transceiver Upperfloor Gateway of Upper floor s Thermokon EasySens has been selected for the radio communication The red field indicate that at least one of the gateways is offline This is a general status information about the communication status to the gateways The field becomes green as soon as all gateways change there state to online STC Ethernet Node Define all available gateway in the section called STC Ethernet Node Press the button STC Ethernet node to add a new gateway Name Each gateway can be named individually e g gateway of ground floor This eases the assignment of the gateway to the floors in the next step Type Select the corresponding device type of the gateway STC or SRC IP Address Port Set the IP address and port number to the IP address port number assigned to the gateway during the configuration process of the gateway STC Ethernet program Line State check The button indicates the connection state Clicking the button will start a com
259. room Wall Dimmer 1 OFF Bedroom Balcony Jalousie 1 DOWN Ground Floor Garage Switch_1 OFF Upper Floor Staircase Switch_1 OFF Living Room South E Jalousie_1 DOWN_ADJUSTED Living Room West S Jalousie 1 UP Bedroom Dressing Room Switch_1 OFF Living Room Floor Lamp Switch_1 OFF Living Room Wall W Dimmer_1 OFF Nursery Balkony Jalousie_1 DOWN Bathroom Wall Dimmer_1 OFF Nursery Ceiling Dimmer 1 OFF Living Room Wall E Dimmer_1 OFF Office Balcony Jalousie 1 DOWN_ADJUSTED Living Room West N Jalousie 1 UP Living Room South W Jalousie_1 DOWN_ADJUSTED Bathroom Mirror Cabinet Switch_1 OFF Office Entrance Switch_1 OFF connecting devices gt gt Start Programm creating rooms Boot Up cmon 25 26 27 28 29 1 2 356 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31123 4 5 amp Filter Communication General State changes Block outputs show latest message Activate filters to concentrate the information flow on that information you are interested in The check box show latest message activates automatic scrolling of the text window The latest event will be shown at the end of the text Double click on a device in the tree view to see only messages of the device Double click on a room to see all messages Page 301 301 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Weather There is a dedicated page for weather information This page displays information and trends collect
260. rotokoll EM wetter Einstelungen Test Mo Di Mi Do Fr Sa So D i 25 11 12 13 14 18 19 20 21 a 25 EJ 27 28 ET Rx Tx 03 0308 18 06 37 The structure of the logging tab is similar to the network tab There is a tab workspace area for each room This tab presents the recorded state information on a time line The calendar provides direct access to certain dates Event list The event list shows all events in chronological order The shown information is time stamped Following information are shown radio messages state changes of the blocks outputs of the blocks general information of the program Page 300 300 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 2008 03 04 4 myHomeControl File Ep Visualization amp Network 08 08 23 094 08 08 23 115 08 08 23 266 08 08 23 396 08 08 23 440 08 08 23 520 08 08 23 761 08 08 23 783 08 08 23 861 08 08 23 884 08 08 23 978 08 08 24 161 08 08 24 342 08 08 24 365 08 08 24 380 08 08 24 402 08 08 24 423 08 08 24 508 08 08 24 592 08 08 24 846 08 08 25 762 08 09 10 116 08 09 12 669 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Test lists 1 Logging t Options Bathroom Balcony Jalousie_1 UP Upper Floor Gallery Dimmer 1 OFF Bed
261. row 3 If a scene participant shall keep its actual state in case a certain scene will be activated then set the corresponding set point value of the scene to Syntax of the scene values Switching actuator Dimmer actuator Jalousie actuator The arrow keys up down might be used to reorder the scene paritcipants The table shows a set point value for each scene and each scene participant These values might be edited within the table The user is able to modify the scene values in the visualization view as well refer to Teaching of a scene Teaching of a scene If one of the scenes buttons e g will be pressed for about 5 seconds then the actual states of the scene participants will be collected by the scenes block and stored accordingly Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Scenes The scene block supports the Activation Feature KO Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 221 221 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Screensaver This function controls either the monitor s or the screensaver Screensaver Command input pin gt j sam Funktion The screensaver block is able to control following objects Object OFF command Monitor s Monitor s get turned on Monitor s get turned off Screensaver Screensaver active Screensaver inactive This option is not yet available Additional application samples Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks
262. rted This is indicated by the check mark in the checkbox irrigating An irrigation period might also be started or stopped manually by checking the checkbox Page 196 196 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Indication in the properties dialog Residual Humiditiy _ irrigating lt Residual humidity of soil last irrigation 17 14 07 01 2008 Application sample There are two pumps installed One irrigates the indoor plants the other one the plants outdoor The following example shows an indoor and an outdoor application Teva ays Irrigation Periode min Start Time Residual Wenger P L_ irrigating last irrigation 17 31 31 01 2008 m vw active last ewent The rain input pin of the irrigation block responsible for the terrace has been connected to the corresponding output pin of the weather station In this case the irrigation block resets the estimated humidity of soil to 100 if the weather station indicates some rain This is not the case with the irrigation block for the indoor plants Atthe average of every third day irrigation period will be started The irrigation starts at 3 00 in the morning The irrigation block supports the Activation Feature CH Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization element Irrigation Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 197 197 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 458 Keypad This block provides Keypads w
263. rving the visualization elements different situation can be run through and tested Hovering the mouse over an input pin of a network block will show a list of the last commands or signals the block received via this input Received Commands 2008 02 05 22 20 56 824 Corridor Entrance Rocker 1 gt 0N 2008 02 05 22 20 56 913 Corridor Entrance Rocker 1 gt ONy 2008 02 05 22 20 58 838 Corridor Entrance Rocker 1 gt OFF 2008 02 05 22 20 58 921 Corridor Entrance Rocker 1 gt OFFy 2008 02 05 22 21 00 738 Corridor Presencelndicaton Presence gt 0N 2008 02 05 22 21 00 739 Corridor Presencelndication Presence gt ONyv Meaning of the lines lt Date gt lt Time with milliseconds gt lt Floor or Room gt lt Block name gt lt Pin gt gt lt Value gt Page 24 24 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Value With analogue Values the shown figure represents the transmitted value with commands ON represents an ON command without key press information OFF represents an OFF command without key press information ONv an ON key has been pressed ON an ON key has been released OFFv an OFF key has been pressed OFF an OFF key has been released The simulation can also be processed in offline mode This means even if there is no transceiver connected or even if there are some of the EnOcean devices still missing Without saying the simulation can be done also with connected transceiver and fully teached in devices Probably this saves s
264. ry to be started automatically at user logon This is a similar mechanism to the auto start group which can be found under Start gt Programs gt Autostart During user logon Windows check for applications indicated to be started and runs them Windows updates often require reboots after they have been processed To enable the auto start of myHomeControl a automatic user logon is required To configure Windows to automatically logon a user following Keys have to be set in the registry Use the regedit to edit the registry entries Navigate to HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Winlogon Edit or append following keys DefaultUserName Name DefaultPassword passwort AutoAdminLogon 1 Reshow hidden messages Reshow hidden messages Press the button on the right to enable the locked info messages again Example The following message will not be shown any more if you check the checkbox Don t show this message again La R AER t Navigational information Use the restore down button to return to the design mode T Don t show this message again Page 310 310 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Check for updates lf this setting is checked then myHomeControl checks for updates at every program start in design mode not in presentation mode In case a new update is available then a dialogue pops up containing information about the update and offering the user the o
265. s Rooms contains items If a web page is called by the browser then a list of buttons representing the different floors of the project are going to be shown If one of these buttons is clicked then the display changes and buttons for all rooms and items of the corresponding floor are going to be shown The pressed floor button is going to be marked orange A click on a room button opens the corresponding room and all items of that particular room are going to be shown The pressed room button is marked orange Clicking an item button toggles the state of the corresponding item or opens the item and shows more detailed information and controls A second click on one of the button closes the corresponding context Page 291 291 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Operation mode As soon as the CompactWEB functionality has been enabled in the settings menu myHomeControl will create web pages Any browser can be used to view these web pages myHomeControl installs a WEB server which is used to host the web pages representing the project and its actual states The WEB server is part of the installation package and doesn t require any additional configuration As link the user has to enter either the IP address or the name of the computer running myHomeControl By default the amount of simultaneous browser sessions is limited to 3 The license option CompactWEB large eliminates this limitation Advice Various
266. s EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 05 10 00 Window Handle Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Application sample gt Refer to Window Monitoring Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Window Handle Additional application samples Interrupt heating in case a window has been opened Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 289 289 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH abc Comment Use the comment block to place your comments somewhere in the workspace of the network area lt has no influence to the control functions Page 290 290 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Compact WEB CompactWEB is a WEB browser based representation of the project The representation is simplified and compact Therefore it might be used with small displays e g mobile devices The CompactWEB feature must be enabled under Settings WEB CompactWEB Ground Ground a Ground First Bath Bedroom Linda ia Mike Sea F Mike Lights in First Bed Stairs cz Blinds Ceiling Temperature Basement The menu structure is according the floors and rooms structures of the project Floors contains rooms and items e g lights blinds window
267. s In case Forward OFF Cmd is checked the block forwards OFF commands Check invert to invert the polarity of the forwarded commands The forwarding of the received commands will be delayed by the value given in the field Delay Example Gen Fie _ Forward ON Cmd Forward OFF Cmd Only OFF commands will be forwarded These Flin commands will be delayed for 10 Seconds ae In case the block receives an ON command tri duration informatior d ii er during the delay of the OFF command it will Delay ec reject the pending OFF command m vw active last event OF sean cn Denen ef s Page 192 192 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Gen Fe _ Forward ON Cmd Forward OFF Cmd _ strip key press duration information a es m vw active last ewent OFF kein Aetion Deactivation Achon No Action Boot p cmon Only OFF commands will be processed The OFF commands will be converted into ON commands The filter block sends an ON command to its successor blocks in case it receives an OFF command Strip key press duration information converts the key presses into a command without key press information State indication The filter block does not have an internal state except the activation state The filter block just forwards the commands received Additional application samples PTM230 Module Central OFF Delayed Off Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks lt The info line indicates the actual con
268. s Rooms and Devices This tree view provides new elements to be dragged in into the workspaces De Tree view of already used Floors Rooms and Devices If there are e g two lights physically connected to the same switch actuator then drag a switch actuator symbol from the tree view new Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan This creates the visualization element for the first light In the background a switch actuator block has been created by myHomeControl This switch actuator can be seen now in the tree view used Floors Rooms and Devices The visualization element for the second light has to be dragged in from the tree view used Floors Rooms and Devices There are now to visualization elements representing the same switch actuator If you operate the actor by clicking on the visualization element both visualization elements will change their state Page 44 44 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Insert visualization elements into the operational areas Use the mouse to select an object from one of the trees and drag it into the floors area or the general controls area Drop it at the appropriate location by releasing the mouse button Location selection and alignment of elements Location To locate a visualization element grab it with the mouse Following rules have to be considered Light symbols have to be grabbed at the symbol itself Indication elements might be grabbed anywhere in there
269. s function Learn FUD61NP GN A U230V oN new devices turn dim Speed to min old devices turn dim Speed to max set upper wheel to LRN After learn change to following settings turn to min turn dim Speed to max Thermokon SRC ADO BCS Refer to Application sample Dimmer Jager Direct GN A U230V oN GN A R12V UD Additional application samples Constant light control Universal controller Thermokon SRC ADO BCS Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks i Dimmer 10 This block represents a 10 channel dimming actuator e g of type e g Verve X2110 lt serves as a container for 10 single channel dimming actuator blocks 19 Each channel of the 10 m fold dimming actuator acts like a single channel dimming actuator Page 136 136 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH lt Represents the whole device lt Represents the first channel lt Represents the second channel The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Dimmer 10 Page 137 137 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 1 Jalousie 1 This block represents a jalousie sun blind or roller shutter actuator Function This block generates radio messages to control a physical jalousie actuator Thi
270. s Observer Input The duration off the switch off delay has to be set in the Properties dialog New generations of dimmer actuators support the central command EEP 07 38 02 using STM Telegrams This enables the dim actuator block to send illumination intensity values to the dim actuator This is very useful regarding scenes Adjust the light intensity with the set point slider Up and down ramp defines the time period of increasing the illumination intensity up to the set point and vice versa Brighten with the X button defines with of the buttons or O turns on light or increases the brightnes dimming Buttons In case the switch mode is activated only a large button is visible This button switches the light ON and OFF Switching ON the dimmer lights up to the predefined set point illumination intensity In case the switch mode is deactivated two small buttons are visible These buttons control the illumination intensity They allow to dim up and down by long clicks and to switch on and off by short clicks The upper button increases the light intensity the lower button decreases the light intensity State indication The actuator is in the OFF state An OFF command has been sent through the output pin The Actuator is in the ON state An ON command has been send through the output pin The Actuator is in the ON state the switch off delay function is running Indication of the remaining switch off delay time
271. s and rooms Rooms can be dragged in from the tree view New Floors Rooms and Devices Tab Functions Page 304 304 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Tree views myHomeControl used tree views in different areas of the application There are two types of tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices Used Floors Rooms and Devices New Floors Rooms and Devices Hen Floors Rooms and Devices This tree view shows all elements blocks which can be 1 43 Atlas Group a inserted in the workspace area s on the left side of the tree 4 4 Etako ge Tast changes the sorting criteria between Le EnOcean re manufacturers EE A PTM 250 product types ee RCM120 xxx Amount of available items in tree view Ba Drag new elements out of this tree view and drop them aD somewhere in the workspace area See Handling blocks oOo hem RCM 250 5 9 Window Contact Hie Flextron Use the context menu right mouse button to get help on the z B Funkstuhltechnik selected element Hautau 4 Hoppe zi Jager Direct Hr Keback amp Peter Omnio zem PEHA Schlegel DUX gt Servodan aft Spartan e steute 2 Themokon E Unotech ate Tabs of the tree view 868MHz Each supported and enabled communication medium is presented by its own 315MHz Product Tab Elements in these tabs represent real products Generic If you can t find a certain product within this tab refer to the tab Generics The b
272. s block Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks E Weather station This feature is available if the License option Weather has been enabled This block provides the weather signals measured by a weather station device The weather station device has to be connected to the PC by an interface such as e g RS232 RS485 USB Only one weather station can be connected to the PC at a time The appearance of the weather station block differs between the different weather station types Not all weather station provide the same range of signals Weather Station Out Temp Out Humidity In Temp In Humidity Wind Direction Gust Wind Speed Rain mmh Rain Total mm Rain Yesterday m Air Pressure COD OO COD OO OO CH The left side of the properties dialog provides a list box where the type of weather station can be selected The right side provides station specific settings D we D DE ElsnerPO3 Communication port for the weather station COM w Page 285 285 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Following Weather station are supported by myHomeControl Huger Oregon Scientific WMR 918 and WMR 928 NX Connection between myHomeControl and the Weather station via Serial Port RS232 Oregon Scientific WMR 100 and WMR 200 Connection between myHomeControl and the Weather station via USB Elsner Elektronik PO1 und PO3 For details refer to htto Awww elsner elektronik de 3c_wetter htm Connection between myHomeContro
273. s block has to be teached to a real jalousie actuator 1 2 2 2 Locking gt He Pecans ZE 5 1 Name 452 FU EP JR Product PEHA 452 FU EPJR e Addr 18h C send 1 Command input initiating a drive to the darkening position Posion Long drive 0 2 Command input initiating a drive to the shading position Short drive darkening 50000 DrivingTime ms Calibration Run H DrwingT me ms Tilt Time ms is darkening is shading W Enable the locking feature Observer invert The position slider indicates the estimated position of the jalousie The jalousie provides two default positions Darkening position The jalousie will be completely lowered The end position is defined by the darkening driving time The button Calibration Run helps to evaluate the correct driving time Shading position In this case the jalousie will be lowered to middle position and then it will be adjusted to let some sunlight pass the jalousie The end position is defined by the shading driving time The adjustment is defined by the tilt time Depending on which input the block receives the command to move the jalousie will be driven to the darkening or the shading position A tilt time value greater then 0 activates the adjustment of the jalousie when it reaches its shading position The adjustment allows controlling the sunlight entering the room in the shading situation The radio buttons in the Observer are
274. s have to be configured in the BIOS settings The PC should restart automatically after power off The energy saveing options have to be configured in a way that the CPU is allways enabled an is able to process myHomeControl Turning off disks doesn t make sence because myHomeControl stores state information into the database which retriggers the disk periodically Page 32 32 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Capability characteristics Number of supported sensors Number of supported controllers actuators Supported gateway types Number of supported gateways Number of supported cameras Motion detection Number of visualization elements Number of timers Number of logic functions Number of arithmetic functions Number of scene controllers Sequences SMS Email Presence simulation Number of facades to be shaded Energy management functions Audio Weekly or yearly based timers Irrigation Obstruction alarm SQL data base XML file Interfacing third party systems Supported languages Remote access WEB Interface Automatic bill of materials Online help Project design Project documentation Boot p cmon unlimited according license unlimited 128 per gateway according license USB LAN TCP IP RS232 R8485 unlimited according license unlimited limitation given by type of used cameras and power of PC individual for each camera software 2000 unlimited unlimited
275. s the corresponding set point on demand The window state sensor activates the last set point in case the window has been opened The last set point has the highest priority and overrides any of the other set points The switch actuator RCM250 controls a thermo dynamic valve for the heating Page 355 355 myHomeControl Bool Up GmbH Proportional Heating Valve from Kieback amp Peter This sample shows a individual room temperature control application with the valve actuator from Kieback amp Peter A Room Temperature Sensor measures the actual temperature of the room and provides a setpoint value for the heating control The radiator is controlled by the valve actuator from Kieback amp Peter Solution1 internal heating controller The valve actuator provides an internal heating controller Therefore the output pins of a Room Temperature Sensor block can be directly connected to the input pins of the valve actuator block MD1IS FTL 30 04 2011 On If the input pin SP Temp is connected then the valve actuator uses the internal heating controller In case the input pin SP Pos is connected then the valve actuator just drives the valve corresponding to the received position setpoint The connection line between the room temperature sensor block and the valve actuator block is used to force the emergency control mode of the valve actuator in case no radio telegrams are received from the room temperature sensor An OF
276. s well as in the visualization Multiple instances of a link element might be placed in floor tabs The configuration of a link element target floor tab Pin code visibility is valid for all instances of that particular link element Refer to chapter Link to find details about the network functionalities Page 102 102 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Configuration Select a target floor tab for the link 7 PIN Enable the PIN if PIN code shall be requested from the Visible tabs user before the target tab becomes visible visible List of all tab which shall be visible after the link has been called Those tabs configured as always visible will never be hidden by a link Page 103 103 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appearance in the floor plan area Button When clicking the button the corresponding floor tab is going to be shown The text on the button corresponds to the elements name The link element is gray in edit mode In presentation mode it becomes fully transparent and therefore invisible lf the user clicks to the room containing the link element the link is called and the corresponding floor tab is shown Sample Utility room A similar behavior can be reached using the zoom Clicking the picture calls the link Appearance in the general controls area Button Page When clicking the button the corresponding floor tab is going to be sho
277. se the WEB interface an gain full control over you electrical equipment and the utilities Refer to chapter Infrastructure for further details Remote access via Internet using a WEB Browser or mobile phone To access the WEB pages by means of accessing the myHomeControl WEB server requires configuration of certain network devices e g router and modems Find a guide in appendix E The simplicity of the structure of the WEB pages allows to browse the pages by simple mobile phones only supporting WAP Usage of an alternative WEB server To do Page 298 298 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Multiple Operating Stations This feature is not available yet It is still under construction The client server architecture requires enabling of the license option ClientServer Configuration Multiple operating stations This is the server station For station profiles see tab Operating Station Profiles This is a client using profile IF address of the server Page 299 299 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Loggings The logger views provide a look into the past myHomeControl logs continuously received and transmitted radio messages as well as generated commands These events might be visualized by different views Time line The Logging tab shows all recorded state changes of the actuators It visualizes all actions in the past T myHomeControl DOR Datei ED Bedienung E Netzwerk listen P
278. se the button is released before the delay has expired then no command is sent to the successor blocks Individual delays can be configured for the l and the O button J gt Name Kosos O O O O O o 8 Minimum duration of the keystroke ON UP 2 SI sec OFFIDOWN sec strip key press duration information Activation Properties Input field ON Delay time for the button Input field OFF Delay time for the O button Strip key press duration information converts the key presses into a command without key press information The block supports the Activation Feature Application sample Minimum duration of the keystroke ONIUP sec OFF DOWN sec strip key press duration information Activation Only if the button is pressed for at least 3 seconds the horn gets started The O button stop the horn immediately Page 200 200 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH E Link The link block might be used to automate sequences according the operations of the user ON or OFF call link gt Activation input gt lt ON Link has been executed Function If the block receives an ON or OFF command on its input pin then the link get called within the visualization This means the configured target tab is going to become visible and the rest of the tabs will be hidden or not depending on the configuration of the link Whenever the link is called by the user itself or via a command at the input pin then
279. se visualization elements represent sensors actuators or even logical functions The visualization element shows the actual state of the corresponding device The visualization element also provides controlling of the corresponding device Examples of visualization elements Cen dw EE 6 Ui i d i ground Bar Doar ring oO Typically the visualization element can be adapted to a certain situation in a floor plan Therefore some visualization elements provide dedicated pick dots to adjust the size or e g the illumination range Additional adaptation options can be selected opening the property dialog of the visualization element Each of the visualization elements relates to a corresponding block in the network area Within the network area the element will be interconnected with other functions Page 50 50 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 m Visualization Element Zoom In case the rooms in a floor plan are to small to place visualization elements in it then a Zoom visualization element might be used This is usually the case if a floor plan contains many rooms as e g in office buildings The Zoom visualization element represents e g a zoom of the room in the floor plan or an other view of a room This element can only be placed in the floor plan area re myHomeControl ra myHomeControl Datei Ep Bedienung Netzwerk Listen Einstellungen Test Datei Ed Bedienung J Netzwerk LU Listen Einstellungen
280. sed for temperature control in case the guest room is unoccupied The button switch PTM 250 activates deactivates the set point The forth set point value gets activated by the absence function The temperature controller block controls the room temperature according the selected set point value considering the set point shift In the sample above set point 3 is used because it is the activated set point with the highest priority The temperature controller block determines a suitable pulse pattern for the switch actuator to control the heating valve State indications 0 00 be Pulse output is OFF 100 00 A Pulse output is ON 1 20 00 Set points 1 and 3 are activated This is indicated by the rectangle around the set point value indication Set point 3 is selected and used for the temperature control because it is the activated set point with the highest priority 2 18 00 4 10 00 Page 238 238 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Properties Set points E Name Temperatur Controller Index invert Value kA 18 15 10 Nr of Setpoints defines the amount of set point provided by the temperature controller block Used Setpoint indicates the number of the selected set point which is used for the temperature control This value is just indication There is an individual row for each set point as shown below Index Number of the s
281. sualization element changes the state on each click List of the available appearances Appearance Symbol oO Appearance specific configuration items Pasition RE i Position of the visualization element within the floor horizontal Ek z verica i Border Size of the element or border adjustment dot d and adapt it to the situation wall mounted ceil mounted p z The supervision area is free i 7 Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan OI o u z Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the The supervision area is occupied Page 59 59 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area LJ Visualization Element PTM Radio Button This visualization element represents one or more channels of PTM radio button This enables the user to operate the PTM radio button on the screen This visualization element can be placed in either the floor plan area or the general controls area There are Appearances for the floor plan area and the general controls area The chapter PTM Radio Button describes the network functionality in detail Appearance in the floor plan area In case of a finger tip on the visualization element a control dialog will be opened Within the design mode the visualization element F has to be tipped for about 3 seconds until the control d
282. supporting the Central Command EEP 07 38 02 provide an input for the brightness 0 100 0 switches the light of Ab Name F DEINP 28 Product Eltako FUD61NP Addr 208 z E Switch Mode 0 H Off Delay min cl Setpoint 3 LG Up Down Ramp sec Brighten with the O Button Brighten with the I button a Name FUD12NPN 52 09 28 Product Eltako FUDT2NPN 52 09 Addr 1A R Switch Mode D a Off Delay min Setpoint 100 3 Bw Dow Ramp sec Brighten with the O Button Brighten with the l button Page 133 133 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The Switch Mode checkbox activates the switch mode In this mode the dimmer acts as a switch ON OFF It is not possible to dim the light any more via a connected PTM radio button The light intensity has to be set via the properties dialog or in the visualization This functionality easies the handling of the light Switch mode is deactivated Dimming is enabled Switch mode is activated Dimming is disabled In case the switch actuator block changes its state to ON due to an ON command on the command input or an ON command on the observer input it starts the switch Off Delay function if the switch off delay is set to a value greater then 0 The switch off delay function automatically switches the actuator off after the delay period The switch off delay function will be started even if the block receives an ON command over it
283. t a This section becomes visible in case the block has been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus Modbus TCP Slave Slave 4 Cmd Up Coil 0 1 Cmd Down Coil 1 1 Driving Up Base ku Driving Down a Tu Positron ModbusTCP Slave The list box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with Cmd Up This binary signal is written by the switch block to the slave It is ON as long as the blind shall drive up In case the function channel Driving Up is activated then the block tracks the position of the blind according to the function channel Driving Up Cmd Down This binary signal is written by the switch block to the slave It is ON as long as the blind shall drive down In case the function channel Driving Down is activated then the block tracks the position of the blind according to the function channel Driving Down Driving Up This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block This means if the read signal is set then the block drives its model of the blind up Driving Down This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block This means if the read signal is set then the block drives its model of the blind down Page 144 144 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 2 Jalousie 2 This block represents a 2 channel jalousie actua
284. t gt value of the output lt pulse output 1 temp setpoint gt selected set point 2 temp setpoint 2 setpoint activation gt 3 temp setpoint 3 setpoint activation gt Function Set point management The block allocates two input pins for each set point One is used to feed in the set point value the other one is to control the activation of the set point An ON command activates the set point an OFF command deactivates it The activation state of the set point is indicated by a black rectangular surrounding the set point value The first set point is always active and can not be deactivated There are different priorities assigned to the set points The first set point has lowest priority to last set point has highest priority The activated set point with the highest priority is used for the temperature control This value is also forwarded to the corresponding output of the block Temperature control The temperature control part of the block calculates the output for the heating Therefore the block compares continuously the actual temperature and the set point and controls the output accordingly The calculated value for the output is forwarded to the value output pin In case thermo dynamic valve actuators shall be used these kind of devices can be easily controlled by a regular switch actuator Thermodynamic valve actuators have only two states open and closed The temperature control bl
285. t with illumination area Pick up the light at the light symbol to move it to any location of the floor plan Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot and adapt it to the situation Turn on an off the light with a fingertip on the light symbol Switch actuator block is OFF and in state Blocked e g due to a Load Limitation For details refer to Network Switch 1 Switch actuator block is ON and in state Blocked e g due to a Load Limitation Therefore the physical Switch actuator is turned OFF For details refer to Network Switch 1 Appearance specific configuration Appearance Lamp Off Select an icon indicating the off state of the light Icon The yellow icon will always indicate the on state Select if there shall be an indication if an on or off indicate Off Delay delay is in progress indicate On Delay A dot in the lower left corner of the icon is indicating that a delay is in progress H delay D on delay Page 83 83 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Appearance Indication of states trip heating Chose an individual symbol for each state on off ee Give individual texts for each state A heating ok p This appearance supports the flashing mode If flashing mode is activated the color of the symbol will alternate between the ON color and the OFF color as long as the actuator block resides in the ON state This feature can be activated in
286. t additional information s will be shown Following supplementary information is available The visualization of this information is configurable Sue ETER m Minimal and maximal temperature 15 9 9 oo gn 09 01 2008 Me mm a A ul AHA OUT UL LLG Pi l u Bi E MF MMM i es MM Page 70 70 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up cmon outdoor temperature The temperature profile as trending diagram I 16 1 Additional information dialog 0 0 04 01 0007 1 6 1 S 1 E d e 09 07 2008 Reset Minima Maxima The actual temperature will be recorded and presented in form of a trending diagram Also the minimal and the maximal temperature will be recorded Press the button to reset the stored values Page 71 71 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH a Visualization Element Window Contact This visualization element represents a window contact sensor Refer to chapter Window Contact to find details about the network functionalities The Window Monitoring informs about the state of all the windows Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the window contact icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available for this visualization element af Name Window Contact Ground Floorwindow Contact _ enable simulation If simulation is enabled the visualization element c
287. t irrigation 00 00 01 01 0001 u vw active last event Activation Acton Dee tone Aeon Function After rain fall or irrigation the block resets the residual humidity of the soil to 100 The calculation will reduce the estimated residual humidity of the soil continuously Once the estimation expects a residual humidity of 0 it releases the irrigation But the pump s will not be started until the given start time described later At a temperature of 20 C and an air humidity of 50 the next irrigation will be started exactly after the given irrigation interval In case of higher air humidity or deeper temperature the interval will be stretched In case of lower air humidity or higher temperature the interval will be shortened The irrigation period defines how long the pumps will be switched on The start time defines at what time of the day the pump s might be started Sometimes it is most convenient to run the pump s at night because nobody gets disturbed and the effectiveness is best There is no need to connect all input signals of the irrigation block Those signals which are not connected to any predecessor blocks will not be taken in account for the estimation Therefore e g the rain input shall not be connected in case of irrigating indoor plants State indication As soon as the estimation of the residual humidity of the soil comes below 0 and the time of day corresponds to the start time an irrigation period will be sta
288. t of parameters and there values It enables the user to modify the parameter values by finger tipping a value Refer to chapter Settings to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Automatic OFF Max Windspeed 5 34 mis Appearance in the general controls area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Page 117 117 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 50 Visualization Element Window Monitoring This visualization element indicates open or tilt windows The shown names of windows or doors correspond to the names given in the network area Appearance in the floor plan area This visualization element cannot be placed in the plan floor area Appearance in the general controls area Windows of the ground floor e All windows or doors are closed All Windows are The house can be left now without compunction closed Windows of the ground floor e The French window to the balcony is open ground floor bed room All other windows and doors are closed All open windows or doors will be listed in the white list box The French window to the balcony is tilt All other windows and doors are closed All tilt windows or doors will be listed in the white list box Windows of the ground floor The open windows doors and the tilt windows doors F will be listed separately Refer to chapter Window monitoring to find details about the network f
289. t pins lt Position signal lt ON if window is open lt ON if window is in tilt position lt ON if window is closed Position signal O position unknown 1 closed 2 tilt 3 open Page 288 288 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH The forwarded information s are redundant But the presence of the information as signal and as command might simplify to build logic with other blocks Buttons The Properties dialog provides to simulate to window positions This simplifies the testing of the network Take in account as soon as the block receives a radio message from the window handle sensor it will change back to the real state State indications Window closed The window handle is in the downward situation The position signal has been updated An ON command was sent to the yellow indicated output pin OFF commands where sent to the other command pins Window in tilt position The window handle is in the upward situation The position signal has been updated An ON command was sent to the yellow indicated output pin OFF commands where sent to the other command pins Window open The window handle is in the horizontal situation The position signal has been updated An ON command was sent to the yellow indicated output pin OFF commands where sent to the other command pins This block provides the individual logging This is a sensor block and has to be teached Supported EnOcean Profile
290. t switches on one or two minutes earlier or later Latitude northern coordinates require a positive sign southern coordinates require a negative sign Longitude eastern coordinates require a positive sign western coordinates require a negative sign To evaluate the coordinate values refer to one of the given links or to Google Earth Page 314 314 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Google Earth DI ll E oncezeldeeacopgl Fa N D J agms amnor 2 Loi Bern Switzerland Meinten Sie u La Ss all Meine Orte spe eu LEI EI esch bel ie Bern switzerland FM amp Sightseeing TE E Start your Google Earth world tou we me EE WE een ee E ee ia r K niz Ansicht Hauptebene 200 Europa Technologies D seat Prim re Datenbank EN A WETS 2007 Geozen i Waar a KR E Gel nde a WS 200 Cnes S pot Image Google r Geografie im Web AEUR G S Ths i Zeiger 46 56 52 87 NEIE EA 0 H he 541m bertragung I 100 Sichth he 1613 U These are the coordinate values you may enter The N S value corresponds to the latitude the E W value to the longitude Regard the signs when copy the values to myHomeControl Page 315 315 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Email Menu Settings Email This configuration item belongs to the functions send sms send email Email SMTP Server smtp gmail com POPS Server pop gmail com User nam
291. t version of myHomeControl with your language included Page 378 378 myHomeControl Bool Up GmbH Appendix E WEB Remote Access Remote access to the myHomeControl WEB server Following configuration steps will be required to enable remote access to myHomeControl s WEB server 1 Assign a fix IP Address to the Computer running myHomeControl 2 Create an account at DynDNS org and create a host 3 Configure the modem router of your local network Assign a fix IP address to host PC Assign a fix IP address to the pc running myHomeControl This is required to configure a route on the modem router Assign an IP address of the same sub net the DHCP server of your router does but outside the range of the DHCP server Next step is to create an account at DynDNS Create an account at DynDNS org Each participant in the Internet requires a world wide unique IP address Usually the DSL modem request an IP address from the Internet provider during the connection process to the Internet This unique IP address is used to access the modem respectively a PC behind the modem from any location in the world by entering http lt IP address gt in the browser address field Internet providers typically change the IP address from time to time The actual IP address has to be retrieved from the modem router and is usually unknown Therefore it is not possible to retrieve the IP address from outside to access the computer remotely This is where D
292. te An OFF command triggers the block to change to the unlocked state Depending on the configuration of the block the block requests the input of the PIN code by the user The block only changes to the requested state if the user enters the correct PIN code Otherwise the block stays in its original state In case the block changes state from locked to unlocked state then the block sends out an OFF command through the output pin Vice versa it sends an ON command in case the block changes from the unlocked to the locked state Properties m Name PIN PIN Code HIN code entering timeout min Request PIN to lock J Request PIN to release Simulation 5 PIN code PIN code which has to be entered by the user PIN code entering timeout The input mask for the PIN stays open for this duration After the configured time period the input mask closes automatically and the block stays in its original state Request PIN to lock if this option is checked then the block requests the input of the PIN code every time the block changes state from unlocked to locked The block changes to the requested state after the user inputs the correct PIN Otherwise it stays in the original state Request PIN to unlock if this option is checked then the block requests the input of the PIN code every time the block changes state from locked to unlocked The block changes to the requested state after the user inputs the corre
293. tem name for the web object has been modified then it will not be updated automatically if the name in the project is modified To reinitiate the automatic update of the web name delete the entry in the field Item Name in the dialog shown above Create Index Page for CompactWEB If this option is checked then myHomeControl will create an index page table of content of the pages available within the project The index page is called Index aspx Browsers typically opens this page if only the host address has be given by the user Additional web pages The menu create web page adds an additional page to the web configuration tree Individual unique names have to be given to the different additional pages These names are used to address the page in the browser Page 297 297 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Sample The web page Office is accessed via the address http myName dyndns org Office aspx Smart phones e g the IPhone used as a remote control State of the art mobile phones provide usually Internet abilities and are enabled to browse web pages either connecting to the Internet or a local WLAN Therefore these devices can easily be used as a remote control for myHomeControl Requirement is a local WLAN which is connected to the PC running myHomeControl Then enable WLAN on the phone start the browser e g Safari and enter the IP address of the computer running myHomecControl to brow
294. ter reading tariff 1 Actual tariff P Settings of the visualization element bw Name Solarpanel Geschossname Solarpanel enable simulation Appearance Digital Indication HA Appearance Digital Indicaton show name Shows the name of the block in the visualization E element Trend Description of the Curve Ertrag Description string of the trend graph Color of the Curve a Color of the trend graph Save Data Duration of Trend Position hor zontal 286 Border hor zontal 0 width 174 Page 56 56 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Keycard Switch This visualization element represents a Keycard Switch Refer to chapter Keycard Switch to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the presence indication sensor icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available Symbol Eu D Place the symbol with the mouse at any location of the floor plan J J Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot d and adapt it to the situation Picture There is the opportunity to define an individual image for each state keycard removed keycard inserted Page 57 57 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Leakage This visualization element represents a
295. the address which is located in the properties dialog of the root element of the device Then calculate the address found in the StartUp telegram and enter it into the field calculate hex to dez FFFF3346h 4294914886 Page 259 259 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Control Unit The Control Unit block receives its data from a DUX Control Unit of the company Schlegel Radio transmitters DMF A DMF B or from a radio position switch of the company Steute EF 95 xx EF 41 xx This block might be configured according to the buttons or selectors available on the control unit It forwards button presses or selections to the follower blocks Name DUX Control Unit sae Type The Properties dialog offers the opportunity to select the corresponding sensor type Following types are available single button momentary DUX Module DMF A Steute EF 41 xx EF 95 xx Commands ONv ON bin momentary single button maintained Module DMF A Commands ONv ON Selector with 2 positions momentary Module DMF A Commands ONv ON Selector with 2 positions maintained Module DMF A Commands ONv ON 2 Buttons two button momentary Module DMF B Commands ONv ON OFFv OFF Selector with 3 positions momentary jumping back to middle position Module DMF B Commands ONv ON OFFv OFF Selector with 3 positions maintained Module DMF B Commands ONv ON OFFv OFF Button s Click on the corresponding buttons
296. the corresponding location of the plan A symbol for the light is now shown at this location The border around the symbol shows the illumination area of the light It can be adjusted by moving the corresponding adjustment dot a Clicking the light symbol switches on and off the lights Rename the light now so that it can be recognized in a later step To rename the light open the properties dialog by hovering the mouse over the black rectangle in the upper right corner of the light symbol An appropriate name could be Kitchen The next step explains how to configure functions Page 13 13 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Drag in a dimmable light Dimmer in the left upper corner of the living room Name it floor light Drag in a blend and place it in front of the Window Drag in a scene block and place it at the corner to the entrance door For further hints to edit element refer to chapter The Design mode myHomeControl should look now as follows F myHomeControl alsk Fie p Visualization Network L23Lists FLogging 2 Options E Test Pss Sensors H Actuators 3 VE Door Controller wii Presence Simulation Scenes H Monitoring Er Foor L Room Allgemein Used Floors Rooms and Devices g Er Groud Floor 27 02 08 16 5511 The expanded tree view used Floors Rooms and Devices shows what devices are already inserted into the project The first part of the configuratio
297. ties of Blocks Multiplication This function multiplies the values of all connected signals Formula Output product of the signal values of all signals connected to the input pin Properties Neme ees a6 m active last event Activation Action No Action Deactivation Schon No Action This block supports the Activation Feature amp Additional application samples Page 206 206 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 207 207 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Operator Screen This block Ai Name nem a6 m vw active last ewent Ltd Dencivaion Ac ono Raon _ Properties The operator events on which the block shall react have to be defined in the settings of the Visualization element Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Operator Screen The set point block supports the Activation Feature Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 208 208 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 1 Or The Or Block sends an ON command in case it receives an ON Command from at least on of its predecessor blocks It sends an OFF command after the reception of OFF commands from all of its predecessor blocks OFF m w active last event OFF Ben cn e aon Function The Or block checks the Or Condition It changes between two states Or Condition fulfilled The bloc
298. tion where the recordings will be stored can be defined within the properties dialog refer to parameter Path to store recording The maximal time period for the recording can be configured within the properties dialog as well refer to the parameter Time period for recording The file containing the recording will be named as following Page 252 252 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH lt Name of the block gt _ lt Date of recording YYYYMMDD gt _ lt Time of recording HHMMSS gt AVI Use the windows media play to watch the file The recording might also be started due to a motion detection event Therefore the motion detection has to be enabled first then check the Record on motion option Operator Buttons There is the opportunity to activate an ON and an OFF button In case a button has been activated then it will be shown within the visualization element and can be operated by the user These buttons raise corresponding command sent by the command output pin Buttons of the block This feature might be used to activate a door opener if the user presses a button on the visualization element of the camera Motion Detection The camera function provides a motion detection option If Enable Motion Detection has been checked then the camera function monitors the life pictures of the camera for motion If motion detection has been activated the block becomes an additional pin Motion In case the funct
299. tionalities A 4 Visualization Element Jalousie A This visualization element represents a quad jalousie actuator This actuator is a combination of 4 single jalousie actuators When you drag in a jalousie 4 icon a jalousie 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the quad jalousie actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Used Floors Rooms and Devices Ep Hoor D A Desk 34 4 1 Jalousie 1 4 2 Jalousie 1 4 3 Jalousie 1 3 4 4 Jalousie 1 To insert the second channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 4 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter Jalousie 4 to find details about the network functionalities 12 Visualization Element Jalousie 12 This visualization element represents a quad jalousie actuator This actuator is a combination of 12 single jalousie actuators When you drag in a jalousie 12 icon a jalousie 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the 12 fold jalousie actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Page 80 80 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Used Floors Rooms and Devices aE Elz 950 JRM S40 FU DI 12 1 Jalousie 1 DI 12 10 Jalousie 1 12 11 Jalousie 1 12 12 Jalousie 1 3
300. to its output pin s Blocks connected to these pins will receive the commands The upper pin corresponds to the left rocker the lower one to the right rocker Page 16 16 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH To prevent the light in the kitchen to stay switched on in case the user forgets to switch of the light set an off delay of 120 minutes in the properties dialog of the switch actuator block The light will be switched of automatically at least after 2 hours i Name Kitchen Off Delay man _ invert The switch actuator block represents a real switch actuator within myHomeControl It evaluates commands received from its preceding blocks It generates radio message controlling the state of the corresponding real switch actuator To benefit of the scene functionality it is worth to configure the dimmer block to act in the dimmer mode instead of the switch mode for details refer to Dimmer Set up the floor light as shown in the figure below DP Name foot D Adr 2 Off Delay min _ supports STM telegrams Setpoint 100 H Down Ramp sec Page 17 17 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Next is to connect the Output Pin of the PTM Radio Button block with the Input Pin of the switch actuator block Click first the output pin of the PTM Radio Button block and then the input pin of the switch actuator block To disconnect click the pins in the similar way first click on the output pin
301. ton In case SW1 will be activated the block generates an ONv command If it get deactivated then the block generates an ON command The activation deactivation of SW2 will generate corresponding OFF commands Refer to the application samples This is a sensor block and has to be teached Page 271 271 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element PTM Radio Button Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 05 02 01 Light and Blind Control EU Application Style e EEP 05 02 02 Light and Blind Control US CAN Application Style e EEP 05 03 01 Light and Blind Control 4 Rocker Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Additional application samples PTM230 Module Device specific hints Sauter This device is shown in myHomeControl as two blocks one Room EY RU110 146 Temperature Sensor and one PTM Radio Button Both blocks have to be inserted individually into the project Each of them has to be teached individually Refer to Device specific hints for the Room Temperature Sensor Refer to Application Sample in Appendix C Eltako The devices send following information FSM12 UC FSM61 Button pressed
302. ton Turn middle wheel away from LRN and back Operate other button of rocker The actuator itself defines which button means on and which means off After teach in lower and middle wheel to position AUTO upper wheel to position ES RT Teach in myHomeControl The switching actuator block has to be teached as Direction switch This device always interpretes the O Button of a PTM Rocker Switch as an ON command and the I Button as an OFF command Teach in set channel number at lower wheel turn middle wheel to position LRN To send the teach in telegram do not use the send button of the properties dialog of the switch actuator block Use the button on the surface of the block instead Click the button once for ON Page 151 151 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Eltako FSR12 12V DC Turn middle wheel away from LRN and back Click the button once for OFF After teach in middle wheel to position AUTO upper wheel to position ES RT In case the actuator works in opposite state check the Invert checkbox in the properties dialog of the block If observer input is used rocker push button has to be linked to the actuator as well Directly linked PTM rocker switches to the swicht actuator und usage of the observer input FSR 12 127 2 Because the device allways interpretes the O button as an ON command which is unusual to EnOcean devices the signal has to be inverted as shown in the picture a
303. tor A It serves as a container for 2 single channel Jalousie actuator blocks 1 Each channel of the quad jalousie actuator acts like a single channel jalousie actuator lt Represents the whole device lt Represents the first channel lt Represents the second channel The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Jalousie 2 a Jalousie 4 This block represents a 4 channel jalousie actuator e g of type e g REGJ24 01 A It serves as a container for 4 single channel Jalousie actuator blocks 1 Each channel of the quad jalousie actuator acts like a single channel jalousie actuator lt Represents the whole device lt Represents the first channel Jekusie4 Eu Represents the second channel CI 0 The channel block can be located individually in the workspace area It is also possible to use them to individual rooms The only restriction is that they cannot be deleted individually Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Jalousie 4 Page 145 145 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 12 Jalousie 12 This block represents a 12 channel jalousie actuator e g of type 950JRM from PEHA This
304. ts required for the access to the WEB pages depends on how the WEB pages shall be accessed via a WEB browser on a PC connected to the local network wireless via a laptop PC or a smart phone from the Internet Aes Ce myHomeControl wie Automatik i Lokales Intranet Gesch tzter Modus In 3 v 100 v RE The router interconnects the various PC in the network It assigns IP addresses DHCP server to the PCs and solve the names DNS server Usually PC are configured to request an IP address from the routers DHCP server when they establish the connection to the network Typically routers are pre configured by default to serve the IP address request and to solve the name requests Usually it is sufficient to connect PCs to the router then to start a WEB browser and to enter the name of the PC where myHomeControl is running Page 293 293 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Access the WEB server wireless via a laptop PC or a smart phone To access myHomeControl WEB pages wireless a wireless access point is required within the network Usually a wireless router is used for this purpose Dr i t api x e hi BEREITETE SEE ER 2 C Lokaler Intranet Geschotster Modus f gees u nr m ER Lokales Intranet Gesch tzter Mod n ba f Beste awonten res Refer to chapter Smart phones e g the IPhone used as a remote control Acc
305. ts the setup of the block correspondingly Page 270 270 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Supported EnOcean Profiles EEP The EnOcean Standard defines a couple of profiles used for the interpretation of the radio telegram Refer to Appendix A to get an overview on the profiles This Block supports following profiles e EEP 07 07 01 Occupancy e EEP 07 08 01 Range Olx to 510Ix 0 C to 51 C and Occupancy e EEP 07 08 02 Range Olx to 1020Ix 0 C to 51 C and Occupancy e EEP 07 08 03 Range Olx to 1530Ix 30 C to 50 C and Occupancy e Private Omnio Eagle Supported Devices Appendix B list the devices supported by this block Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks E PTM Radio Button The PTM radio button block evaluates the radio messages transmitted by a PTM radio pushbutton device It supports the PTM100 module with up to 4 channels rockers and the PTM200 module with up to 2 channels it supports the PTM230 module as well The PTM radio button block evaluates the button pushes and forwards them as ON and OFF commands trough the corresponding output pins Left O l rocker Door Le Right OU rocker I Use the property field Button Layout to adjust the amount of channels PTM230 The two channels SW1 and SW2 of the module are mapped to rocker A D Best is to select Button Layout single Channel 1 SW1 corresponds to the I button and channel 2 SW2 to the O but
306. tuations Insert and remove conditions a v active last event Actvation Acton No Action Deactvaton Schon Send OFF Cmd Actual Load This field indicates the actual load e g kW The indicated value corresponds to the signal value received on the input pin Power Actual Load This field indicates the actual load as a value basing on the Power Limit value Power Limit This is the input field for the power limit e g xyz kW This value corresponds to 100 Sampling Interval This is the input field for the sampling interval in seconds This means the duration between two measurements of the power consumption The Load Limitation function requires this value to determine the latest time to block consumers In case the input pin Sampl interval has been connected then this field acts only as an indication and is read only Conditions Each row of the table defines the behavior during a certain overload situation There is the opportunity to append additional rows A row defines a condition This means it defines the behavior of the Load Limitation function in case of an overload situation between the overload value of the previous row and the own overload value in the sample above defines the second row the behavior between overload of 10 and 30 The cell accepted defines the duration how long the overload situation will be accepted For unlimited duration enter a instead of
307. ture Therefore the valve actuator block has become some new properties Some properties have to be adjusted manually when upgrading to version 1 2 2 of myHomeControl Property Setpoint Offset Range Tab Device Configuration Product Thermokon SRC DO Typi PWM Temperature Range 400 H Setpoint Offset Range Df so e 4 Enable Temp Lowering Set values used by the valve actuator Refer to the manual of the valve actuator to determine the correct values For Omnio devices set 5 5 Thermokon devices usually use a range of 5 5 by default Property Correction Tab Signal values 200 12 Temperaturer 17 0 Setpoint Temp 1 Cones Temp Lowering Page 384 384 myHomeControl Bool Up GmbH With the new method a temperature correction should not be required any more Therefore set the property to 0 In case temperature control in not accurate enough feel free to adjust the correction property Page 385 385
308. ualization element in chapter Visualization Element PulseCounter Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 214 214 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH PulseGen This block acts as a pulse generator It generates a pulse with adjustable interval and pulse width Command input gt Reset gt Activation input gt lt Pulse output Function An ON command received on the command input pin activates the pulse generation an OFF command deactivates it The button in the center of the block activates or deactivates the pulse generation as well The block sends at the start of a new pulse an ON command and at the end of the pulse a OFF command There is an option to limit the amount of pulses sent by the block to a certain value This block supports the Activation Feature Properties We Name Piecen ER Interval ms 1000 LS On period ms 500 Limit the Number of Pulses Number of Pulses Pulses sent Activation The Interval defines the period for the generation of the pulses This is the time between two pulses The On Period defines the pulse width This is the time between the ON command and OFF command Interval On Period If Limit the Number of Pulses has been checked then the block stopps sending out pulses as soon as its actual pulse counter reaches the configured Number of Pulses value The reset button as well as the reset input resets the actual pulse counter The block continues to g
309. ue shown within the temperature setpoint curve frame indicates the actual setpoint value retrieved from the curve The graph shows the progression of the reference curve used today Clicking the graph opens the editor for temperature reference curves Page 68 68 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 11 12 CEER BS EE P fri td d This editor enables the user to adjust the curve s and tune the behaviour of the heating The curves can be modified by draging one of the red control pads or be draging on of the yellow slider controls By clicking the corresponding sectors of the red pads fine tuning can be done In case a yellow slide is going to be dragged automatically an additional red pad appears To get rid of a superfluous pad adjust it in line with two other pads Superfluous pads will be deleted by the editor automatically There is the opportuninty to create up to 7 reference curves which can be assigned to individual days of the week The button copies the selected curve and inserts the new curve directly after the selected curve The button deletes the selected curve Page 69 69 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH t Visualization Element Temperature This visualization element represents a temperature sensor It shows the actually measured temperature The visualization element records minima and maxim values as
310. unctionalities Page 118 118 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Network Select the Network tab to enter the network area Within the network area the devices will be interconnected and additional functionalities can be defined Room Workspace ar myHomeControl Demo File EP Visualization ZG Network 23 Lis yn RS List of avaliable EE ee block types ge e i i pg List of used 21 11 08 092254 e el blocks Tabs of all the rooms Page 119 119 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Introduction The programming work is done by drag and drop of blocks representing sensor and actuator devices or convenience functions And by interconnecting them with mouse clicks Blocks represent sensor or actuator devices or convenience functions PTM radio button Switch actuator Jalousie actuator The Connections between the blocks forward commands and signals Page 120 120 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Er amp Floors and Rooms Usually are sensor or actuator devices located in the rooms of a building Rooms and Floors will be used as structuring utility within the project Floors and Rooms can be created within the network area BZ myHomeControl Demo TBR New Floors Rooms and Devices File EP Visualization El Network 4 Lists Options Test 21 11 08 09 26 14 The Floors and Rooms serve as the workspace area to insert blocks and connect them
311. unity to append a supplementary language Refer to appendix D for further details Orientation of buttons Orientation of Buttons O ON button on top Gei ON button bottom This setting defines the orientation of the PTM radio buttons to be used button above or below the O button Jalousie mode Jalousie mode Gi long key press O short key press There are two different types of blind actuators long key press the blind runs to its end position in case the key is pressed for a long period of time and it adujsts if the key is pressed for a short periode short key press the blind runs to its end position in case the key is pressed for a short period of time and it adjusts if the key is pressed for a long periode This setting defines which type of jalousie actuators have been installed Page 309 309 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Unit Temperature Unit Temperature Gei Celsius O Fahrenheit This setting defines the unit of the temperature values and there display Autostart F Start application at power up The program registers itself in the registry of the operating system to be started automatically at power up of the computer myHomeControl runs as a standard application not as a background service Therefore the auto start works only after a user has been logged in If the option Start application at power up has been checked myHomeControl registers itself within the Windows regist
312. usRTU via a serial Port or a USB serial converter The dialects RTU and ASCII are supported Both protocolls might be operated in parallel New Floors Rooms and Devices In case the option Modbus has been licensed then an Modbus Special Functions additional tab appears in the tree view New Floors Rooms and Sendibinary Devices The tree view list all object which can be operated Ge Fl Sendfanalog with Modbus Elb Receiveibinary Elb Receivelanalog A Radio Chair al SH Keypad T Keycard Switch sen 1 Jalousie 1 ci Dei Control Unit a 4 Brightness ModbusTCP This communication requires the license option Modbus TCP WAGO BECKHOFF or any other Ethernet Field bus devices might be used as IO devices as long as they support the ModbusTCP protocol Settings Settings Mod Bus Omie Fieldbus Nodes a Name IP address Port Line State Node 1 192 168 0 1 502 ae Modbus Node Field bus nodes All nodes have to be defined in the area Field bus Nodes Use the Modbus Node button to append a supplementary transceiver Name Each of the field bus nodes might be named This simplifies the assignment to the floors in a later step Page 332 332 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH IP Address Port This communication type requires the input of the IP addresse to enable myHomeControl to address the s
313. usies will be raised at the end of the sleep phase Exit lights If the absence function is activated from the screen during darkness then the block turns on all lights connected to the Exit lights output pin for about 15 minutes This gives the user the opportunity to securely leave the building If the absence function is activated via the activation input e g phsical button no Exit lights will be turned on Temperature control The temperature control requires the parameter Heating hours before return lf the users enters a return date at check out and the time period until return is longer then twice the Heating hours before return then the temperature set points are going to be changed The temperature set points will be switched back to there normal values one period Heating hours before return before the date of return given by the user at checkout The AnalogMux blocks switches the temperature set point for the heating or cooling between the value received from the room temperature sensors and a constant value of e g 5 degrees Celsius This is controlled by the absence function security functions and logic If the presence simulation block get activated it sends an ON command through the absence pin 4 This command might be used to activate security and monitoring functions as well as dedicated logic If the block gets deactivated it sends an OFF command thru this pin When the user returns it
314. utton pressed for a while the button takes over the actual intensity set point and stores it This is acknowledged by yellow coloring of the button Dimming actuators NOT supporting the EEP 07 38 02 or any STM telegrams These kind of dimming actuator only support a touch dim function Therefore it is not possible to transmit a intensity value directly to the actuator The up and down buttons control the light intensity as the do with real PTM radio buttons eg Sas ae ee i Page 76 76 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH i Visualization Element Dimmer 10 This visualization element represents a 10 fold dimmer actuator This actuator is a combination of 10 single dimming actuators When you drag in a dimmer 10 icon a dimmer 1 visualization element representing the first channel of the 10 fold dimming actuator will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices 2 49 X2110 Low 10 1 Dimmer D kl 10 2 Dimmer 1 kl 10 3 Dimmer 2 kal 10 4 Dimmer 3 bal 10 5 Dimmer 4 Low 10 6 Dimmer 5 La 10 7 Dimmer E bal 10 8 Dimmer 7 kl 10 9 Dimmer 3 d 10 10 Dimmer 3 To insert the second channel into the floor plan drag in the corresponding icon 10 2 from the tree view Used Floors Rooms and Devices Refer to chapter Dimmer 10 to find details about the network functionalities Page 77 77 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH 1 Visuali
315. vices and transmitters The Id filter filters all EnOcean messages received and rejects all messages with EnOcean ids not contained in the list of valid Ids Only messages with an id contained in the list of the filter are going to be processed by myHomeControl all other messages will be droped This feature is helpful if teach in should be demonstrated or executed during fairs or training courses where lots of devices belonging to other installations e g neighbor booth are frequently operated Configuration of the id filter The id filter is setup via a dedicated file This file can be found under the menu gt other files gt EnOcean gt EnOceanldFilter xml The file is structured as follows lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt EnOceanIdFilter xmilns http myHomeControl ch EnOceanIdFilter xsd Version 1 xmins xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance gt lt EnOceanlId id 19534 description rocker push button gt or alternativly lt EnOceanId idHex 23A5F8 description window contact gt lt EnOceanId id descriprtion gt lt enDOceanla id descriprion gt lt EnOceanid id descripticn gt lt EnOceanldFilter gt Use an editor e g to modify the file in case the id filter feature is liked to be used Therefore enter the ids of the sensors in question into the corresponding fields and give a short description lt EnOceanId idHex 23A5F8 description window contact gt
316. visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Keycard Switch Page 264 264 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Application sample Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Modbus Function Channels optional Name eee tea Product Generisch KeylardSwitch gt Ex Modbus TCP Slave Slave e ik This section becomes visible in case the block has n dr into the project from th M 5 State input 0 e been dragged into the project from the tab Modbus D Delay OFF cmd sec ModbusTCP Slave The List box shows all defined Modbus slaves Select the corresponding slave device the block should interact with State This binary signal is read by the block from the slave It is used to track the state of the block Page 265 265 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Leakage The leakage sensor block forwards an ON command in case it detects leakage The battery is monitored as well Bad battery is indicated by a dedicated output of the block 21E A Name D Product Atlas Group El Ge xx naar eg Drais M 3 Clicks Communitation Timeout man 20 HH Function The leakage sensor block provides 3 output pins lt ON leakage OFF no leakage lt ON battery bad OFF battery ok lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed The Properties dialog provides testing features to simulate the leakage and battery states Take in account that your inputs will be overwritten by the n
317. web page shall show the project tree 1 1 This saves configuration effort for the web interface Page 296 296 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Bool Up GmbH Add link for this Url on index page Optionally myHomeControl creates an index page table of content referring the different web pages of the project see CompactWEB create index page If the setting Add ling for this Url on index page is checked then the page appears on the index page Password An individual password can be assigned to each web page The user is requested to enter the password the when she he browses the page Request password for internet clients only This setting defines if the password is always requested also in case the page is browsed from the intranet or only if the page is browsed from the Internet Item settings Certain items require additional settings e g the PTM button switch i i J The rocker push button in the project has 2 rockers The rocker push button symbol in the web page represents only one rocker Therefore there is the opportunity to configure which of the rockers is represented by the web symbol Button O Channel Wem Name Button Text on the key Hem Name Many of the WEB objects provide the opportunity Item Name to give an individual name to the WEB object different to the one given in the project The item name for the WEB object corresponds to the item name of the project by default In case the i
318. which button pair is represented by this visualization element Switch mode The visualization element stores the last key pressed and snaps in the corresponding button This indicates which function has been activating last In this mode also for OFF a picture can be assigned Page 61 61 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Button side by side The buttons will be rearranged Channel _ Switch Mode Button text _ Buttons Side by Side Naming of the buttons Also a picture can be selected for each button These Picture Button Text pictures will be shown on the left side of wO A he bution OFF OFF ground floor Door Hiding Buttons Either the ON or the OFF button might be hidden Remove the Button Text and the picture to hide the corresponding button PTM Radio Button E UU Tite DTM Radio Button mn Channel Picture Button Text on Geschossname FTIM Radio Button Visualization Element PTM Radio Button 8 This visualization element represents a 8 fold PTM Radio Button or a 8 fold wireless transmitter unit This element is a combination of 8 PTM Radio Button elements When you drag in a PTM Radio Button 8 icon a PTM Radio Button visualization element representing the first channel of the 8 fold sensor will be placed into the floor plan area The other channels can be found in the three view Used Floors Rooms and Devices RI F8512 ff 81 CO To insert the second channel into the flo
319. wn The text on the button Maintenance corresponds to the elements name Display in presentation mode All hidden floor tabs are not shown Display in edit mode All floor tabs are shown all the time The hide state of the floor tabs is indicated by icons on the tab Invisible Visible always visible Setting of the floor tab ei Floor Page 104 104 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Visualization Element Load Limitation The visualization element Load Limitation informs about the actual consumed load e g power in kW It also indicates if consumers have been blocked turned off to prevent overload A trend shows the consumption over the time Refer to chapter Load Limitation to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area This visualization element cannot be placed in the general controls area Appearance in the general controls area Load Limitation Power consumption level is below the limit The i consumption is shown as a trend green Power Limit blue consumed power red power consumed in case no consumer would have been blocked turned off The actually consumed power is above the limit Therefore the indication is red The overload situation doesn t actually conflict one of the defined conditions Therefore none of the consumers has been blocked Load Limitation u The actual power consumption is below the limit But consumers have
320. ws Log lt project name gt _ lt block reference gt _ lt yyyy MM dd hh_mms gt _00 csv Project name as defined in general settings project name Block reference floor name _ room name _ block name The files are stored to the path defined in the general settings protocol Page 249 249 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 E Brightness The Brightness block evaluates radio message transmitted by a brightness sensor e g on basis of a EnOcean STM100 Modul There is the opportunity to activate a low pass filter for the brightness values Name hres G sa Range 300 30000 lx s Filtertime ec Brighiness lur The block forwards the brightness signal as LUX value to its output pin Depending on the sensor type a value range has to be selected Following ranges are available 300 30 000 lux 600 60 000 lux The brightness block provides to different output pins lt Brightness as average LUX value lt ON life sign ok OFF life sign missed The Properties dialog offers the opportunity to simulate the brightness value Enter a value into the brightness field or move the slider to a corresponding position Take in account that your inputs will be overwritten by the next reception of a radio message transmitted by the sensor device In case the value of the Filtertime will be set to a value gt 0 then a low pass filter will be activated This filter filters the received brightness values A typical value for shading is 15 mi
321. xcel spread sheet where the information shall be copied Press Ctrl V to insert the copied cells oy a ee IY List of Blocks The List of Blocks Main menu Lists List of Blocks list all blocks used in the actual project It shows the location where the blocks are located by means of floor and room Page 335 335 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH e Summary of all Bloc ks Block Type Count Block Reference licensed Brightness 2 we Dimmer A simulation Office Ceiling wf simulationComftort Couch Online Comfort Couch BB Unline Ofice Ceiling Filter Jalousie 1 Presence Indication PTM Radio Button Radio Chair Room Temperature Sensor 3 SS SSS TS STS STS Switch 1 The column licensed indicate the license state of the blocks Unlicensed blocks will remain in a blocked state They will not react on input signals and will not generate any output signals on there pins Block is enabled and works as expected 1 Block is blocked This row contains blocked blocks 1 BR lt s myHomeControl runs in demo mode blocks are enabled 1 1 Incase the communication to the gateway is in blocked state due to any license conflicts even enabled blocks may not work in expected manner The column Block Reference contains links If one of the links gets clicked then the corresponding element will be selected in all the views Page 336 336 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH
322. y Name Value Decimals Unit Appearance eM see Outtemperature 60 00 2 T continuing Hoor IdentifierDoor Door OFF Hoor erger dn tem Intemperature 22 10 T continuing Lei dl Start Stop enable Logging enable The optional Name appears in the visualization element as signal identification The Appearance defines if the trend of the signal is shown continously or stepped If Start Stop is checked an additional input pin is shown by the block This pin is used to control the recording An ON command starts recording an OFF command freezes recording and the trends shown by the corresponding visualization elements An ON command restarts recording old values will be dropped Logging enable advises the block to write recorded data to a logfile The name of the log file is derived from the block name The path configured on the general settings page is used to store the log file A new log file is created for each recording phase Find details about the corresponding visualization element in chapter Visualization Element Display Handling Blocks Properties of Blocks Page 184 184 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Division Thais block divides the value of the signal connected to the upper pin by the value of the signal of the lower pin Output A B In case B 0 then the value of the output becomes the maximal positive value Properties Name ws m v active last event E
323. y The gateway forwards received signals to the myHomeControl application myHomeControl evaluates the signals and generates corresponding to the control function new signals The new signals will be forwarded to the radio gateway The gateway sends them out as radio signals The addressed switch actuator receives the radio signals and e g turns on a light Just to try the demo version skip the chapter Installation of the transceiver radio gateway and proceed to chapter start myHomeControl Installation of the transceiver radio gateway The transceiver receives and transmits EnOcean messages The transceiver is to connect to a serial port of a PC If the PC is not equipped with a serial port use a corresponding USB lt gt RS232 converter Check the associated COM port number after installation of the USB converter using Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager Connect the transceiver to the power supply Remember to select the appropriate COM port number as checked before in the options register of myHomeControl Options gt Communication Page 10 10 myHomeControl Version 1 2 9 Boot Up GmbH Starting myHomeControl Double clicking the e icon starts the myHomeControl Application After the first installation myHomeControl presents as follows The Visualization Er Visualization is selected and new devices Visualization elements can be inserted into the workspace areas
324. y an existing document and rename it to Help XXX where XXX is an abbreviation of the language name In the languages database there is a special key called SPRACH_BEZEICHNUNG The text given in this filed will be used as XXX Microsoft Access M EB 46RY Bay YO GAN VEY Arm Da D dE HomeControilanguage D 0 K Languages Tabelle SS Datum Zeit Datum Zeit date time Erstellt eine Tab Ii SPRACH_BEZEICHNUNG DEU ENG Erstellt eine Tab gt Di Di tue Erstellt eine Tab Datensatz 14 4 52 gt In gt gt von 183 Languages The abbreviation XXX will be appended to the file name Now translate the renamed help file If the Help shall be translated in a later state an alternative Help might be used until then It is possible to combine a language X with the Help of Language Y Therefore set the key HILFE_SPRACHE to the desired language Microsoft Access Languages Tabelle DEOR Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Einf gen Format Datens tze Extras Fenster f BEI X OB SRY Bas gt Ra AN SRY MK Ge DI een ____Englfsh_ _fertuges_ 638 Zustandswechsel Zustandswechsel State changes mudancas do estado E 639 HILFE_SPRACHE Deutsch English English gn pa om on Datensatz MIAIT ser _ pI gt von 609 Datenblattansicht The translated help file has to be compiled into the myHomeControl help system Therefore send the file to info bootup ch We will compile it and you will become the lates
325. ymbol beside will appear BEN in case radio telegrams pending to be send will jam up due to the limited capacity or the transceiver This is typically the case if a Central Off button is pressed Presentation Mode Menu Settings Visualization This configuration item defines the appearance in the presentation mode Following appearances are available Windows The floor plans and visualization elements are shown within a maximized windows form Full Screen The floor plans and visualization elements are shown using the full screen Windowborders title bar status bar and Windows taskbar are hidden Full Screen without menu bar Same as Full Sceen but the menu bar is hidden as well This mode requires the usage of a Design Mode Element Die Vollbild Einstellungen eignen sich besonders fur kleine Bildschirme This option is useful in case a small screen shall be used Mainpage W Mainpage Visible tabs Target tab visible Tab around floor Z lt z Return delay Secs Fj Easement a F d around floor These settings configure the behavior of the automatic return to the main page feature The checkbox in the left top activates the feature Size of Symbols This option defines the size of the symbols of following visualization elements Lamp symbol of switching actuator and dimmer not the illumination area PIR symbol of the PIR not the observation area The given value is valid for all
326. ynDNS helps DynDNS manages IP addresses and keeps informed about the actual IP address Create an account at DynDNS www dyndns org This is free of charge Create a new host within your DynDNS account Give a name you will use to access your host from the Internet e g myNameAtHome Next step is to configure the modem router Configuration of the modem router To enable DynDNS to keep track with the changing IP addresses the DSL modem router has to inform DynDNS periodically about the actual IP address received from Internet provider Usually this is a standard service of a DSL modem router Just activate the corresponding client Host HostName dynDNs org Account myAccountName Usually the router contains a firewall or works on NAT These features prevent any traffic initiated by the Internet to access the devices behind the router But this is exactly what is required to access the myHomeControl WEB server form the Internet Therefore specific channels have to be opened Configure a virtual server at the DSL modem router to enable access to the WEB server Server name external protocol internal Server IP Addr port port WEB Sever mn TR Test from the Internet Establish an Internet connection using a telephone line Start the browser and enter Page 379 379 myHomeControl Boot Up GmbH http HostName dyndns org TeamViewer www Teamviewer com provides a very easy tool for remote desktop It is free for private usage
327. zation Element Jalousie 1 This visualization element represents a jalousie actuator It might be used for blinds and rolling shutters The jalousie can be controlled using this visualization element Refer to chapter jalousie 1 to find details about the network functionalities Appearance in the floor plan area Drag in the jalousie 1 icon from the tree views New Floors Rooms and Devices of Used Floors Rooms and Devices into the floor plan area There are different appearances available for this visualization element Jalousie Pick up the light at the light symbol to move it to any location of the floor plan J Change the size of the visualization element by pulling the adjustment dot i and adapt it to the situation Open the control dialog with a fingertip on the jalousie symbol Press for at a least 1 second if you are in the design mode e a A long tip on this button drives the jalousie to its upper end E position A second tip stops the movement v v A short tip initiates the tip mode Within this mode the jalousie runs as long as the button is pressed zer A long tip on this button drives the jalousie in its lower end position A second tip stops the movement A short tip initiates the tip mode Within this mode the jalousie runs as long as the button is pressed x A long tip on this button drives the jalousie to a configured middle position After reaching this position the jalousie will be

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User`s manual - TL elektronic  LevelOne FCS-1041  取扱説明書 - MARSHAL  T。SHーBA 東芝白熱灯器具取扱説明書 ~~ 保管用 T`s4  Peavey DeltaFex Twin User's Manual  A団むA ST實ND 400/450 基 ~  MANUEL D`UTILISATEUR WIB2 pour PC/USB  Manuale d`installazione, d`uso e manutenzione Installation, use and  Sur des modifications apportées au modèle Cequeau  Danby DAC120EB2GDB User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file